Mechanical engineering and materials Books

Book SynopsisThis issue contains a collection of papers presented at the 72nd Conference on Glass Problems at The Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio. Topics covered include glass melting; refractories; process control; legislation safety, and emissions; recycling and batch wetting.Table of ContentsForeword ix Preface xi Acknowledgments xiii GLASS MELTING Optimization of Burners in Oxygen-Gas Fired Glass Furnace 3 Marco van Kersbergen, Ruud Beerkens, Wladimir Sarmiento-Darkin, and Hisashi Kobayashi Future Energy-Efficient and Low-Emissions Glass Melting Processes 15 Ruud Beerkens, Hans van Limpt, Adriaan Lankhorst, and Piet van Santen Mathematical Modeling to Optimize a Furnace Length by Width Ratio 33 Erik Muijsenberg, Marketa Muijsenberg, Tomas Krobot, and Glenn Neff A Summary of Almost 50 Years of Glass Furnace Preheating 53 George Kopser Is 50% Energy Efficiency Improvement Possible in the Glass Product and Production Chain in 2030? 65 Leon Wijshoff REFRACTORIES Conception of Modern Glass Furnace Regenerators 75 Stefan Postrach, Elias Carillo, Mathew Wheeler, and Götz Heilemann New Cruciform Solutions to Upgrade Your Regenerator 91 D. Lechevalier, I. Cabodi, O. Citti, M. Gaubil, and J. Poiret Bonded Solutions for the Container Market 105 Thierry Azencot and Michele Blackburn Low-Cost Fused Cast Refractories: Some Peculiarities and Connection with Glass Defects 113 P. Carlo Ratto Mullite, Spinel & Calcium Aluminate—Leading the Way for Long Campaign/Energy Efficient Modern Glass Furnace Construction 121 Chris Windle, Trevor Wilson, and Rhiannon Webster MoZr02—A New Material for Glass Melting Electrodes and Molybdenum Glass Tank Reinforcements—Experiences and Insights 135 Mike Ferullo and Rudolf Holzknecht PROCESS CONTROL Changing of Gob Temperature from Spout to Blank 147 Gesine Bergmann, Hayo Müller-Simon, Nils-Holger Löber, and Kristina Kessler High Viscosity Glass Sheet Fabrication 159 Daniel Hawtof Closed Loop Control of Blank Mold Temperatures 167 Jonathan Simon and Braden McDermott LEGISLATION, SAFETY, AND EMISSIONS The U.S. Policy and Political Landscape and Its Potential Impacts on the Glass Industry: Through a Glass Darkly 179 Shelley N. Fidler and Marisa Hecht Achieving a Global Corporate Safety Culture 187 Jeff Hannis Emission Monitoring in the Glass Industry 193 Steve Roosz RECYCLING AND BATCH WETTING Design of a New 25 Ton per Hour Waste Glass Processing Plant for Rumpke 205 Christian Makari and Stefan Ebner Glass Recycling Technology of Today 217 Hoser Moser Cord Testing using Thermal Shock: Virtue or Vice? 221 Gary L. Smay and Henry M. Dimmick, Jr. To Wet or Not to Wet, That is the Question—Part B—Using Dry Batch 231 Douglas H. Davis and Christopher J. Hoyle Batch Wetting—Another Point of View 243 John Brown, Hisashi Kobayashi, Wladimir Sarmiento-Darkin, and Matthias Lindig Author Index 257

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis collection of 33 papers deals with mechanical behaviors associated with systems ranging from diamond reinforced silicon carbide to rare earth pyrosilicates. Presented at The Mechanical Behavior and Performance of Ceramics & Composites Symposium in January 2012 during the 36th International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites (ICACC), it offers researchers from around the world the opportunity to explore new and emerging issues in all aspects of the field.Table of ContentsPreface ix Introduction xi NONDESTRUCTIVE EVALUATION OF CERAMICS SYSTEMS Damage Sensitivity and Acoustic Emission of SiC/SiC Composite During Tensile Test and Static Fatigue at Intermediate Temperature after Impact Damage 3 M. Picard, E. Maillet, P. Reynaud, N.Godin, M. R'Mili, G. Fantozzi, J. Lamon Determination of Acoustic Emission Sources Energy and Application towards Lifetime Prediction of Ceramic Matrix Composites 15 E. Maillet, N. Godin, M. R'Mili, P. Reynaud, J. Lamon, and G. Fantozzi Nondestructive Evaluation of Thermal Barrier Coatings by Optical and Thermal Imaging Methods 27 J. G. Sun Visualization of Internal Defects in Ceramic Products by using a UT Probe Array 35 Yoshihiro Nishimura and Takayuki Suzuki, Katsumi Fukuda, and Naoya Saito Evaluation of Ceramic Materials and Joints using UT and X-Ray 47 Yoshihiro Nishimura, Takayuki Suzuki, Naoki Kondo, and Hideki Kita Investigation of Non-Destructive Evaluation Methods Applied to Oxide/Oxide Fiber Reinforced Ceramic Matrix Composite 57 Richard E. Johnston, Martin R. Bache, Mathew Amos, Dimosthenis Liaptsis, Robert Lancaster, Richard Lewis, Paul Andrews, and Ian Edmonds WEAR, CHIPPING, AND FATIGUE OF CERAMICS AND COMPOSITES Edge Chip Fracture Resistance of Dental Materials 71 Janet B. Quinn, George D. Quinn, and Kathleen M. Hoffman High Pressure Seawater Impingement Resistance of Low Silica Aluminum Oxides 85 Tim Dyer, Ralph Quiazon, and Mike Rodgers Wear Behavior of Ceramic/Metal Composites 93 M. K. Aghajanian, B. P. Givens, M. C. Watkins, A. L. McCormick, and W. M. Waggoner Use of Ceramic Sliding Systems in a Prototype Gasoline Pump with Operating Pressures of up to 80 MPa 101 C. Pfister, H. Kubach, U. Spicher, M. Riva, and M. J. Hoffmann Machinability Studies of AI/SiC/B4C Metal Matrix Hybrid Composites using PCD 1600 Grade Insert 115 Akshay Maheshwari, E.N. Ashwin Kumar, and Anuttam Teja Fretting Fatigue Failure of Engineering Ceramics 125 C. Wörner and K.-H. Lang MICROSTRUCTURE AND MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF MONOLITHIC AND COMPOSITE SYSTEMS Low CTE and High Stiffness Diamond Reinforced SiC Based Composites with Machineable Surfaces for Mirrors and Structures 135 M. A. Akbas, D. Mastrobattisto, B. Vance, P. Jurgaitis, S. So, P. Chhillar and M. K. Aghajanian Tailoring Microstructures in Mullite for Toughness Enhancement 143 D. Glymond, M. Vick, M.-J. Pan, F. Giuliani, and L. J. Vandeperre Microstructures of La-Doped Low Thermal Expansion Cordierite Ceramics 153 Hiroto Unno, Shoichi Toh, Jun Sugawara, Kensaku Hattori, Seiichiro Uehara, and Syo Matsumura Strategies to Optimize the Strength and Fracture Resistance of Ceramic Laminates 163 Raul Bermejo, Zdenek Chlup, Lucie Sestakova, Oldrich Sevecek, and Robert Danzer Investigation of Critical Fiber Length in Phenol Matrix Based Short Fiber CFRP by Double Overlap Joints 175 Daniel Heim, Swen Zaremba, and Klaus Drechsler Mechanical and Microstructural Characterization of C/C-SiC Manufactured Via Triaxial and Biaxial Braided Fiber Preforms 183 Fabian Breede, Martin Friess, Raouf Jemmali, Dietmar Koch, Heinz Voggenreiter, Virginia Frenzel, and Klaus Drechsler Influence of Fiber Fabric Density and Matrix Fillers as well as Fiber Coating on the Properties of OXIPOL Materials 195 Sandrine Hoenig, Enrico Klatt, Martin Frieß, Cedric Martin, Ibrahim Naji, and Dietmar Koch Weave and Fiber Volume Effects in a PIP CMC Material System 207 G. Ojard, E. Prevost, U. Santhosh, R. Naik, and D. C. Jarmon Innovative Clay-Cellulosic Biosourced Composite: Formulation and Processing 219 Gisele L. Lecomte-Nana, Olivier Barre, Catherine Nony, Gilles Lecomte, and Thierry Terracol Processing and Testing Re2Si207 Matrix Composites 233 Emmanuel E. Boakye, Kristin A. Keller, Pavel S. Mogilevsky, Triplicane A. Parthasarathy, Mark A. Ahrens, Randall S. Hay, and Michael K. Cinibulk Reaction Bonded Si/SiB6: Effect of Carbon Additions on Composition and Properties 243 S. Salamone, M. K. Aghajanian, and O. Spriggs, and S. E. Horner Kinetics of Passive Oxidation of Hi-NICALON-S SiC Fibers in Wet Air: Relationships between Si02 Scale Thickness, Crystallization, and Fiber Strength 253 R. S. Hay, G. E. Fair, A. Hart, S. Potticary, and R. Bouffioux Study on the Stiffness of Comeld Composites Joints 261 Hongjian Zhang, Weidong Wen, and Haitao Cui High-Temperature Interlaminar Tension Test Method Development for Ceramic Matrix Composites 273 Todd Z. Engel Tensile Fracture Mechanism of Silicon Impregnated C/C Composite 287 Akio Ohtani and Ken Goto Effects of Target Supports on Foreign Object Damage in an Oxide/Oxide CMC 299 D. Calvin. Faucett, Jennifer Wright, Matthew Ayre, and Sung R. Choi Experimental and Numerical Study on Application of a CMC Nozzle for High Temperature Gas Turbine 315 Kozo Nita, Yoji Okita, and Chiyuki Nakamata Author Index 325

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Ninth International Symposium on Solid Oxide Fuel Cells: Materials, Science, and Technology was held in January 2012 as part of the 36th International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites (ICACC). This symposium provided an international forum for scientists, engineers, and technologists from around the world to present and discuss the latest advances in solid oxide fuel cells. This issue features fourteen papers selected from the symposium, offering readers a broad panorama of the current status of solid oxide fuel cells technology, as well as emerging issues and future directions in the field.Table of ContentsPreface vii Introduction ix Investigation of Novel Solid Oxide Fuel Cell Cathodes Based on Impregnation of SrTixFe1_x03_5 into Ceria-Based Backbones 1M. Brinch-Larsen, M. Sogaard, J. Hjelm and H. L. Frandsen Freeze-Tape Casting for the Design of Anode-Delivery Layer in Solid Oxide Fuel Cells 13Jacob Bunch, Yu Chen, Fanglin Chen, and Matthew May Tailoring the Anode Microstructure in Micro-Tubular SOFCS by the Optimization of the Slurry 23Michele Casarin, Riccardo Ceccato, and Vincenzo M. Sglavo Mixed Conducting Praseodymium Cerium Gadolinium Oxide (PCGO) Nano-Composite Cathode for ITSOFC Applications 35Rajalekshmi Chockalingam, Ashok Kumar Ganguli, and Suddhasatwa Basu Development of GDC-(LiNa)C03 Nano-Composite Electrolytes For Low Temperature Solid Oxide Fuel Cells 47Rajalekshmi Chockalingam, Ashok Kumar Ganguli, and Suddhasatwa Basu Weibull Strength Variations between Room Temperature and High Temperature Ni-3YSZ Half-Cells 61Declan J. Curran, Henrik Lund Frandsen, and Peter Vang Hendriksen In-Situ XRD of Operating LSFC Cathodes: Development of a New Analytical Capability 71John S. Hardy, Jared W. Templeton, and Jeffry W. Stevenson Proton Conduction Behaviors in Ba- and Mg-Doped LaGaOs 85Xuan Zhao, Nansheng Xu, Kevin Romito, Kevin Huang, Alisha Lucas, and Changyong Qin Silver-Palladium Alloy Electrodes for Low Temperature Solid Oxide Electrolysis Cells (SOEC) 93Michael Keane and Prabhakar Singh Development of Improved Tubular Metal-Supported Solid Oxide Fuel Cells Towards High Fuel Utilization Stability 105L. Otaegui, L. M. Rodriguez-Martinez, M. A. Alvarez, F. Castro, and I. Villarreal Highlighting DOE EERE Efforts for the Development of SOFC Systems for APU and Stationary Applications 117David R. Peterson, Jacob S. Spendelow, and Dimitrios C. Papageorgopoulos Efficient Planar SOFC Technology for a Portable Power Generator 125Andreas Poenicke, Sebastian Reuber, Christian Dosch, Stefan Megel, Mihails Kusnezoff, Christian Wunderlich, and Alexander Michaelis Investigation of Ni-Yttha Stabilized Zirconia Anode for Solid-Oxide Fuel Cell using XAS Analysis 137Koichi Hamamoto, Toshio Suzuki, Bo Liang, Toshiaki Yamaguchi, Hirofumi Sumi, Yoshinobu Fujishiro, Brian Ingram, A. Jeremy Kropf, and J. David Carter Processing of Gadolinium-Doped Ceria Electrolyte Layers with a Thickness of ~1 mm: Thin Film Wet Coating Methods and PVD 145Tim Van Gestel, Hyo-Jeong Moon, Doris Sebold, Sven Uhlenbruck, and Hans Peter Buchkremer Author Index 159

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis issue of the Ceramic Engineering and Science Proceedings is one of nine issues published based on content presented in January 2012, during the 36th International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites (ICACC). It features papers from two popular symposia held during the ICACC meeting: Next-Generation Bioceramics explores new research into ceramic materials designed to support and enhance the treatment of dental and medical disorders; Porous Ceramics: Novel Developments and Applications examines some of the latest advances and innovations in processing methods and synthesis, and much more. Charts, tables, and illustrations are included throughout this issue.Table of ContentsPreface ix Introduction xi BIOCERAMICS Effect of Precursor Solubility on the Mechanical Strength of HAP Block 3 Nurazreena Ahmad, Kanji Tsuru, Melvin L. Munar, Shigeki Matsuya, and Kunio Ishikawa Carbonate Apatite Formation during the Setting Reaction of Apatite Cement 7 Arief Cahyanto, Kanji Tsuru, and Kunio Ishikawa In Vitro Evaluation of Silicate and Borate Bioactive Glass Scaffolds Prepared by Robocasting of Organic-Based Suspensions 11 Aylin M. Deliormanl and Mohamed N. Rahaman Translucent Zirconia-Silica Glass Ceramics for Dental Crowns 21 Wei Xia, Cecilia Persson, Erik Unosson, Ingrid Ajaxon, Johanna Engstrand, Torbjörn Mellgren, and Hakan Engqvist Using Microfocus X-Ray Computed Tomography to Evaluate Flaws in Ceramic Dental Crowns 29 Y. Zhang and J. C. Hanan Residual Stress and Phase Transformation in Zirconia Restoration Ceramics 37 M. Allahkarami and J. C. Hanan Heterogeneous Structure of Hydroxyapatite and In Vitro Degradability 49 Satoshi Hayakawa, Yuki Shirosaki and Akiyoshi Osaka, and Christian Jäger Aspects of Antibacterial Properties of Nanostructural Calcium Aluminate Based Biomaterials 57 Leif Hermansson Potential Toxicity of Bioactive Borate Glasses In-Vitro and In-Vivo 65 Steven B. Jung, Delbert E. Day, Roger F. Brown, and Linda F. Bonewald Fabrication of Carbonate Apatite-PLGA Hybrid Foam Bone Substitute 75Girlie M. Munar, Melvin L. Munar, Kanji Tsuru, Shigeki Matsuya, and Kunio Ishikawa UV-lrradiation Modifies Chemistry of Anatase Layer Associated with In Vitro Apatite Nucleation 79 Keita Uetsuki, Shinsuke Nakai, Yuki Shirosaki, Satoshi Hayakawa, and Akiyoshi Osaka Preparation of Magnesium Containing Bioactive Ti02 Ceramic Layer on Titanium by Hydrothermal Treatment 85 Xingling Shi, Masaharu Nakagawa, Lingli Xu, and Alireza Valanezhad Millimeter-Sized Granules of Brushite and Octacalcium Phosphate from Marble Granules 91 A. Cuneyt Tas Microstructures and Physical Properties of Biomorphic SiSiC Ceramics Manufactured Via LSI-Technique 105 Steffen Weber, Raouf Jemmali, Dietmar Koch, and Heinz Voggenreiter Biofluid Flow Simulation of Tissue Engineering Scaffolds with Dendrite Structures 117 Satoko Tasaki, Chiaki Maeda, and Soshu Kirihara POROUS CERAMICS Multifunctional Carbon Bonded Filters for Metal Melt Filtration 125 Christos G. Aneziris, Marcus Emmel, and Anja Stolle Failure and Stiffness Analysis of Ceramic from a 25-mm Diameter Diesel Particulate Filter 139 Ethan E. Fox, Andrew A. Wereszczak, Michael J. Lance, and Mattison K. Ferber Development of Porous SiC with Tailorable Properties 153 Prashant Karandikar, Glen Evans, Eric Klier, and Michael Aghajanian Obtaining Porous Corundum Ceramics by Utilization of Waste Rice Husk—Investigation of Composition, Structure and Thermal Degradation of Rice Husk 163 Irena Markovska, Bogdan Bogdanov, Dimitar Georgiev, and Yancho Hristov Processing, Microstructure and Properties of Reticulated Vitreous Carbon Foam Manufactured Via the Sponge Replication Technique 175 David Haack and Rudolph Olson III Air-Atmosphere Sintering of Si3N4-Based Porous and Foamed Ceramics 187 Philip T. J. Gagnon, Amit K. Gandhi, and Kevin P. Plucknett Comparison of Elastic Moduli of Porous Cordierite by Flexure and Dynamic Test Methods 197 R. J. Stafford, K. B. Golovin, A. Dickinson, T. R. Watkins, A. Shyam, and E. Lara-Curzio Author Index 205

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe 6th International Symposium on Advanced Processing and Manufacturing Technologies for Structural and Multifunctional Materials and Systems was held in January 2012 during the 36th International Conference and Exposition on Advanced Ceramics and Composites. This symposium examined progress resulting from the research and development of advanced processing and manufacturing technologies for a wide variety of non-oxide and oxide-based structural ceramics, particulate and fiber-reinforced composites, and multifunctional materials. This issue features seventeen of those papers, representing some of the most important developments in processing and manufacturing technologies.Table of ContentsPreface vii Introduction ix Contribution to the Understanding of the Microstructure of First Generation Si-C-O Fibers 1Francis Teyssandier, Geraldine Puyoo, Stephane Mazerat, Georges Chollon, Rene Pailler, and Florence Babonneau The Control of Interphases in Carbon and Ceramic Matrix Composites 11Gerard Vignoles, Rene Pailler, and Francis Teyssandier High Volume Production for High Performance Ceramics 25William J. Walker, Jr. Low Pressure Injection Molding of Advanced Ceramic Components with Complex Shapes for Mass Production 35Eugene Medvedovski and Michael Peltsman Ceramic Injection Molding Using a Partially Water-Soluble Binder System: Effect of Back-Bone Polymers on the Process 53Oxana Weber and Thomas Hanemann Green-Conscious Ceramic Injection Molding 63Oxana Weber and Thomas Hanemann Shaping of Large-Sized Sputtering Targets 73Alfred Kaiser TEM Observation of the Ti Interlayer between SiC Substrates during Diffusion Bonding 81H. Tsuda, S. Mori, M. C. Halbig, and M. Singh Joining of Alumina by Using of Polymer Blend and Aluminum 91Ken'ichiro Kita, Naoki Kondo, Hideki Kita, and Yasuhisa Izutsu Diffusion Bonding of Rigid Alumina Pieces using Porous Alumina Interlayers 99Hiroyuki Miyazaki, Mikinori Hotta and Hideki Kita, and Yasuhisa Izutsu Influence of Joining Pressure and Surface Roughness on Flexural Strength of Joined Boron Carbide Ceramics 105Kiyoto Sekine, Takeshi Kumazawa, Wu-Bian Tian, Hideki Hyuga, and Hideki Kita Laser Machining of Melt Infiltrated Ceramic Matrix Composite 113D. C. Jarmon, G. Ojard, and D. Brewer Fabrication of Dendritic Electrodes for Solid Oxide Fuel Cells by using Micro Stereolithography 123Naoki Komori, Satoko Tasaki, and Soshu Kirihara Ion-Exchange Properties of Nano Zeolite a Prepared by Bead Milling and Post-Milling Recrystallization Method 129Toru Wakihara, Ryuma Ichikawa.Junichi Tatami, Katsutoshi Komeya, Takeshi Meguro The Role of Milling Liquids in Processing of Metal-Ceramic-Precursor Powders 135Nadja Holstein, Katharina Wiegandt, Florian Holleyn, Jochen Kriegesmann, Michael R. Kunze, Joachim Scholz, and Rolf Janssen Quantitative Validation of a Multi-Scale Model of Pyrocarbon Chemical Vapor Infiltration from Propane 147G. L. Vignoles, W. Ros, G. Chollon, F. Langlais, and C. Germain Numerical Analysis of Fracture Behavior in Anisotropic Microstructures 159Hisashi Serizawa, Seigo Tomiyama, Tsuyoshi Hajima, and Hidekazu Murakawa Author Index 169

Read more less

Book SynopsisDedicated to the innovative design and use of ceramic materials for energy applications, this issue brings readers up to date with some of the most important research discoveries and new and emerging applications in the field. Contributions come from the proceedings of three symposia, as well as the European UnionUSA Engineering Ceramics Summit. The three symposia are: Ceramics for Electric Energy Generation, Storage, and Distribution; Advanced Ceramics and Composites for Nuclear and Fusion Applications; and Advanced Materials and Technologies for Rechargeable Batteries. An abundance of charts, tables, and illustrations are included throughout.Table of ContentsPreface vii Introduction ix Analytical Techniques for Li-S Batteries 1 Manu U. M. Patel, Rezan Demir Cakan, Mathieu Morcrette, Jean-Marie Tarascon, Mlran Gaberscek, and Robert Dominko Three New Approaches using Silicon in Three Valuable Energy Applications 11 John Carberry Processing of Inert SiC Matrix with TRISO Coated Fuel by Liquid Phase Sintering 25 Kazuya Shimoda, Tatsuya Hinoki, Kurt A. Terrani, Lance L. Snead, and Yutai Katoh SiC-Coated HTR Fuel Particle Performance 33 Michael J. Kania, Heinz Nabielek, and Karl Verfondem Study of the Silicon Carbide Matrix Elaboration by Film Boiling Process 71 Aurelie Serre, Joelle Blein, Yannick Pierre, Patrick David, Fabienne Audubert, Sylvie Bonnamy, and Eric Bruneton Processing of Ultrafine Beta-Silicon Carbide Powder by Silicon-Carbon Reaction 85 S. Sonak, S. Ramanathan, and A. K. Suri Characterization of Failure Behavior of Silicon Carbide Composites by Acoustic Emission 95 Takashi Nozawa, Kazumi Ozawa, and Hiroyasu Tanigawa Recession of Silicon Carbide in Steam under Nuclear Plant LOCA Conditions up to 1400 °C 111 Greg Markham, Rodney Hall, and Herbert Feinroth The Effect of Temperature and Uniaxial Pressure on the Densification Behavior of Silica Aerogel Granules 121 J. Matyäs, M. J. Robinson, and G. E. Fryxell Microstructural Analysis of Nuclear Grade Graphite Materials 133 Kentaro Takizawa, Toshiaki Fukuda, Akira Kondo, Yutai Katoh, and G. E. Jellison A Model for Simulation of Coupled Microstructural and Compositional Evolution 145 Veena Tikare, Eric R. Homer, and Elizabeth A. Holm Characterisation of Corrosion of Nuclear Metal Wastes Encapsulated in Magnesium Silicate Hydrate (MSH) Cement 159 Tingting Zhang, Chris Cheeseman, and Luc J. Vandeperre Impact of Uranium and Thorium on High Ti02 Concentration Nuclear Waste Glasses 169 Kevin M. Fox and Thomas B. Edwards Author Index 181

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book describes the weldability aspects of many structural materials used in a wide variety of engineering structures, including steels, stainless steels, Ni-base alloys, and Al-base alloys. The basic mechanisms of weldability are described and methods to improve weldability are described.Table of ContentsPreface xiii Author Biography xvi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Fabrication-Related Defects 5 1.2 Service-Related Defects 6 1.3 Defect Prevention and Control 7 References 8 2 Welding Metallurgy Principles 9 2.1 Introduction 9 2.2 Regions of a Fusion Weld 10 2.3 Fusion Zone 13 2.3.1 Solidification of Metals 15 2.3.1.1 Solidification Parameters 15 2.3.1.2 Solidification Nucleation 17 2.3.1.3 Solidification Modes 19 2.3.1.4 Interface Stability 22 2.3.2 Macroscopic Aspects of Weld Solidification 24 2.3.2.1 Effect of Travel Speed and Temperature Gradient 27 2.3.3 Microscopic Aspects of Weld Solidification 30 2.3.3.1 Solidification Subgrain Boundaries (SSGB) 32 2.3.3.2 Solidification Grain Boundaries (SGB) 33 2.3.3.3 Migrated Grain Boundaries (MGB) 34 2.3.4 Solute Redistribution 34 2.3.4.1 Macroscopic Solidification 35 2.3.4.2 Microscopic Solidification 37 2.3.5 Examples of Fusion Zone Microstructures 40 2.3.6 Transition Zone (TZ) 43 2.4 Unmixed Zone (UMZ) 45 2.5 Partially Melted Zone (PMZ) 48 2.5.1 Penetration Mechanism 50 2.5.2 Segregation Mechanism 53 2.5.2.1 Gibbsian Segregation 56 2.5.2.2 Grain Boundary Sweeping 56 2.5.2.3 Pipeline Diffusion 57 2.5.2.4 Grain Boundary Wetting 58 2.5.3 Examples of PMZ formation 58 2.6 Heat Affected Zone (HAZ) 60 2.6.1 Recrystallization and Grain Growth 61 2.6.2 Allotropic Phase Transformations 63 2.6.3 Precipitation Reactions 66 2.6.4 Examples of HAZ Microstructure 69 2.7 Solid-State Welding 70 2.7.1 Friction Stir Welding 72 2.7.2 Diffusion Welding 76 2.7.3 Explosion Welding 77 2.7.4 Ultrasonic Welding 79 References 81 3 Hot Cracking 84 3.1 Introduction 84 3.2 Weld Solidification Cracking 85 3.2.1 Theories of Weld Solidification Cracking 85 3.2.1.1 Shrinkage-Brittleness Theory 86 3.2.1.2 Strain Theory 87 3.2.1.3 Generalized Theory 88 3.2.1.4 Modified Generalized Theory 89 3.2.1.5 Technological Strength Theory 90 3.2.1.6 Commentary on Solidification Cracking Theories 91 3.2.2 Predictions of Elemental Effects 94 3.2.3 The BTR and Solidification Cracking Temperature Range 97 3.2.4 Factors that Influence Weld Solidification Cracking 102 3.2.4.1 Composition Control 102 3.2.4.2 Grain Boundary Liquid Films 109 3.2.4.3 Effect of Restraint 110 3.2.5 Identifying Weld Solidification Cracking 112 3.2.6 Preventing Weld Solidification Cracking 116 3.3 Liquation Cracking 119 3.3.1 HAZ Liquation Cracking 119 3.3.2 weld metal Liquation Cracking 122 3.3.3 Variables that Influence Susceptibility to Liquation Cracking 123 3.3.3.1 Composition 123 3.3.3.2 Grain Size 124 3.3.3.3 Base Metal Heat Treatment 125 3.3.3.4 Weld Heat Input and Filler Metal Selection 125 3.3.4 Identifying HAZ and weld metal Liquation Cracks 126 3.3.5 Preventing Liquation Cracking 127 References 128 4 Solid-State Cracking 130 4.1 Introduction 130 4.2 Ductility-dip Cracking 130 4.2.1 Proposed Mechanisms 133 4.2.2 Summary of Factors That Influence DDC 139 4.2.3 Quantifying Ductility-Dip Cracking 143 4.2.4 Identifying Ductility-Dip Cracks 145 4.2.5 Preventing DDC 147 4.3 Reheat Cracking 149 4.3.1 Reheat Cracking in Low-Alloy Steels 150 4.3.2 Reheat Cracking in Stainless Steels 155 4.3.3 Underclad Cracking 158 4.3.4 Relaxation Cracking 160 4.3.5 Identifying Reheat Cracking 161 4.3.6 Quantifying Reheat Cracking Susceptibility 163 4.3.7 Preventing Reheat Cracking 166 4.4 Strain-age Cracking 168 4.4.1 Mechanism for Strain-age Cracking 171 4.4.2 Factors That Influence SAC Susceptibility 178 4.4.2.1 Composition 178 4.4.2.2 Grain Size 179 4.4.2.3 Residual Stress and Restraint 179 4.4.2.4 Welding Procedure 180 4.4.2.5 Effect of PWHT 181 4.4.3 Quantifying Susceptibility to Strain-age Cracking 182 4.4.4 Identifying Strain-age Cracking 189 4.4.5 Preventing Strain-age Cracking 189 4.5 Lamellar Cracking 190 4.5.1 Mechanism of Lamellar Cracking 191 4.5.2 Quantifying Lamellar Cracking 195 4.5.3 Identifying Lamellar Cracking 197 4.5.4 Preventing Lamellar Cracking 198 4.6 Copper Contamination Cracking 201 4.6.1 Mechanism for Copper Contamination Cracking 201 4.6.2 Quantifying Copper Contamination Cracking 203 4.6.3 Identifying Copper Contamination Cracking 205 4.6.4 Preventing Copper Contamination Cracking 205 References 207 5 Hydrogen-Induced Cracking 213 5.1 Introduction 213 5.2 Hydrogen Embrittlement Theories 214 5.2.1 Planar Pressure Theory 216 5.2.2 Surface Adsorption Theory 217 5.2.3 Decohesion Theory 217 5.2.4 Hydrogen-Enhanced Localized Plasticity Theory 218 5.2.5 Beachem’s Stress Intensity Model 219 5.3 Factors That Influence HIC 221 5.3.1 Hydrogen in Welds 221 5.3.2 Effect of Microstructure 224 5.3.3 Restraint 228 5.3.4 Temperature 230 5.4 Quantifying Susceptibility to HIC 230 5.4.1 Jominy End Quench Method 231 5.4.2 Controlled Thermal Severity Test 234 5.4.3 The Y-Groove (Tekken) Test 235 5.4.4 Gapped Bead-on-Plate Test 236 5.4.5 The Implant Test 237 5.4.6 Tensile Restraint Cracking Test 243 5.4.7 Augmented Strain Cracking Test 244 5.5 Identifying HIC 245 5.6 Preventing HIC 247 5.6.1 CE Method 251 5.6.2 AWS Method 254 References 259 6 Corrosion 263 6.1 Introduction 263 6.2 Forms of Corrosion 264 6.2.1 General Corrosion 264 6.2.2 Galvanic Corrosion 265 6.2.3 Crevice Corrosion 267 6.2.4 Selective Leaching 268 6.2.5 Erosion Corrosion 268 6.2.6 Pitting 268 6.2.7 Intergranular Corrosion 271 6.2.7.1 Preventing Sensitization 275 6.2.7.2 Knifeline Attack 276 6.2.7.3 Low-Temperature Sensitization 276 6.2.8 Stress Corrosion Cracking 277 6.2.9 Microbiologically Induced Corrosion 280 6.3 Corrosion Testing 282 6.3.1 Atmospheric Corrosion Tests 282 6.3.2 Immersion Tests 282 6.3.3 Electrochemical Tests 284 References 286 7 Fracture and Fatigue 288 7.1 Introduction 288 7.2 Fracture 290 7.3 Quantifying Fracture Toughness 293 7.4 Fatigue 297 7.5 Quantifying Fatigue Behavior 305 7.6 Identifying Fatigue Cracking 306 7.6.1 Beach Marks 307 7.6.2 River Lines 307 7.6.3 Fatigue Striations 307 7.7 Avoiding Fatigue Failures 309 References 310 8 Failure Analysis 311 8.1 Introduction 311 8.2 Fractography 312 8.2.1 History of Fractography 312 8.2.2 The SEM 313 8.2.3 Fracture Modes 315 8.2.4 Fractography of Weld Failures 320 8.2.4.1 Solidification Cracking 320 8.2.4.2 Liquation Cracking 323 8.2.4.3 Ductility-Dip Cracking 326 8.2.4.4 Reheat Cracking 326 8.2.4.5 Strain-Age Cracking 331 8.2.4.6 Hydrogen-Induced Cracking 332 8.3 An Engineer’s Guide to Failure Analysis 333 8.3.1 Site Visit 334 8.3.2 Collect Background Information 335 8.3.3 Sample Removal and Testing Protocol 336 8.3.4 Sample Removal, Cleaning, and Storage 336 8.3.5 Chemical Analysis 336 8.3.6 Macroscopic Analysis 337 8.3.7 Selection of Samples for Microscopic Analysis 338 8.3.8 Selection of Analytical Techniques 338 8.3.9 Mechanical Testing 339 8.3.10 Simulative Testing 339 8.3.11 Nondestructive Evaluation Techniques 340 8.3.12 Structural Integrity Assessment 340 8.3.13 Consultation with Experts 340 8.3.14 Final Reporting 340 8.3.15 Expert Testimony in Support of Litigation 341 References 342 9 Weldability Testing 343 9.1 Introduction 343 9.2 Types of Weldability Test Techniques 344 9.3 The Varestraint Test 345 9.3.1 Technique for Quantifying Weld Solidification Cracking 346 9.3.2 Technique for Quantifying HAZ Liquation Cracking 350 9.4 The Cast Pin Tear Test 354 9.5 The Hot Ductility Test 357 9.6 The Strain-to-Fracture Test 362 9.7 Reheat Cracking Test 363 9.8 Implant Test for HAZ Hydrogen-Induced Cracking 366 9.9 Gapped Bead-on-Plate Test for Weld Metal HIC 367 9.10 O ther Weldability Tests 370 References 371 Appendix A 372 Appendix B 374 Appendix C 383 Appendix D 388 Index 396

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe first book written on this important topic, Metal Chalcogenide Semiconductor Nanostructures and Their Applications in Renewable Energy provides an in-depth examination of the properties and synthesis of a class of nanomaterials essential to renewable energy manufacturing.Table of ContentsPreface xiii Part 1: Renewable Energy Conversion Systems 1 1 Introduction: An Overview of Metal Chalcogenide Nanostructures for Renewable Energy Applications 3 Ahsanulhaq Qurashi 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Metal Chalcogenide Nanostructures 7 1.3 Growth of Metal Chalcogenide Nanostructures 8 1.4 Applications of Metal Chalcogenide Nanostructures 16 1.5 Summary and Future Perspective 18 References 18 2 Renewable Energy and Materials 23 Muhammad Asif 2.1 Global Energy Scenario 23 2.2 Role of Renewable Energy in Sustainable Energy Future 25 2.3 Importance of Materials Role in Renewable Energy 27 References 30 3 Sustainable Feed Stock and Energy Futures 33 H. Idriss 3.1 Introduction 33 3.2 Discussion 34 References 41 Part 2: Synthesis of Metal Chalcogenide Nanostructures 43 4 Metal-Selenide Nanostructures: Growth and Properties 45 Ramin Yousefi 4.1 Introduction 45 4.2 Growth and Properties of Different Groups of Metal-Selenide Nanostructures 48 4.3 Metal Selenides from III?VI Semiconductors 57 4.4 Metal Selenides from IV?VI Semiconductors 61 4.5 Metal Selenides from V?VI Semiconductors 66 4.6 Metal Selenides from Transition Metal (TM) 69 4.7 Ternary Metal-Selenide Compounds 75 4.8 Summary and Future Outlook 78 Acknowledgment 79 References 79 5 Growth Mechanism and Surface Functionalization of Metal Chalcogenides Nanostructures 83 Muhammad Nawaz Tahir, Jugal Kishore Sahoo, Faegheh Hoshyargar, and Wolfgang Tremel 5.1 Introduction 84 5.2 Synthetic Methods for Layered Metal Chalcogenides 89 5.3 Surface Functionalization of Layered Metal Dichalcogenide Nanostructures 102 5.4 Applications of Inorganic Nanotubes and Fullerenes 110 References 113 6 Optical and Structural Properties of Metal Chalcogenide Semiconductor Nanostructures 123 Ihsan-ul-Haq Toor and Shafique Khan 6.1 Optical Properties of Metal Chalcogenides Semiconductor Nanostructures 124 6.2 Structural Properties and Defects of Metal Chalcogenide Semiconductor Nanostructures 133 References 142 7 Structural and Optical Properties of CdS Nanostructures 147 Y. Al-Douri, Abdulwahab S. Z. Lahewil, U. Hashim, and N. M. Ahmed 7.1 Introduction 147 7.2 Nanomaterials 150 7.3 II-VI Semiconductors 152 7.4 Sol-Gel Process 155 7.5 Structural and Surface Characterization of Nanostructured CdS 156 7.6 Optical Properties 159 7.7 Conclusion 161 Acknowledgments 162 References 162 Part 3: Applications of Metal Chalcogenides Nanostructures 165 8 Metal Sulfide Photocatalysts for Hydrogen Generation by Water Splitting under Illumination of Solar Light 167 Dr. Zhonghai Zhang 8.1 Introduction 167 8.2 Photocatalytic Water Splitting on Single Metal Sulfide 169 8.3 Photocatalytic Water Splitting on Multi-metal Sulfide 173 8.4 Metal Sulfides Solid-Solution Photocatalysts 180 8.5 Summary and Future Outlook 184 References 184 9 Metal Chalcogenide Hierarchical Nanostructures for Energy Conversion Devices 189 Ramin Yousefi, Farid Jamali-Sheini, and Ali Khorsand Zak 9.1 Introduction 190 9.2 Main Characteristics of Cd-Chalcogenide Nanocrystals (CdE; E = S, Se, Te) 192 9.3 Different Methods to Grow Cd-Chalcogenide Nanocrystals 192 9.4 Solar Energy Conversion 212 9.5 Cd-Chalcogenide Nanocrystals as Solar Energy Conversion 219 9.6 Summary and Future Outlook 230 References 230 10 Metal Chalcogenide Quantum Dots for Hybrid Solar Cell Applications 233 Mir Waqas Alam and Ahsanulhaq Qurashi 10.1 Introduction 233 10.2 Chemical Synthesis of Quantum Dots 235 10.3 Quantum Dots Solar cell 238 10.4 Summary and Future Prospects 243 References 243 11 Solar Cell Application of Metal Chalcogenide Semiconductor Nanostructures 247 Hongjun Wu 11.1 Introduction 247 11.2 Chalcogenide-Based Thin-Film Solar Cells 248 11.3 CdTe-Based Solar Cells 249 11.4 Cu(In,Ga)(S,Se)2 (CIGS)-Based Solar Cells 251 11.5 Metal Chalcogenides-Based Quantum-Dots-Sensitized Solar Cells (QDSSCs) 253 11.6 Hybrid Metal Chalcogenides Nanostructure-Conductive Polymer Composite Solar Cells 257 11.7 Conclusions 261 References 262 12 Chalcogenide-Based Nanodevices for Renewable Energy 269 Y. Al-Douri 12.1 Introduction 269 12.2 Renewable Energy 272 12.3 Nanodevices 274 12.4 Density Functional Theory 277 12.5 Analytical Studies 278 12.6 Conclusion 284 Acknowledgments 285 References 285 13 Metal Tellurides Nanostructures for Thermoelectric Applications 289 Salman B. Inayat 13.1 Introduction 290 13.2 Thermoelectric Microdevice Fabricated by a MEMS-Like Electrochemical Process 290 13.3 Bi2Te3-Based Flexible Micro Thermoelectric Generator 292 13.4 High-Thermoelectric Performance of Nanostructured Bismuth Antimony Telluride Bulk Alloys 293 13.5 Nano-manufactured Thermoelectric Glass Windows for Energy Efficient Building Technologies 294 13.6 Conclusion 296 References 297

Read more less

Book SynopsisWith contributed papers from the 2011 Materials Science and Technology symposia, this is a useful one-stop resource for understanding the most important issues in advances in the synthesis, processing, and applications of nanostructures. Logically organized and carefully selected, the articles cover the themes of the symposia: Nanotechnology for Energy, Healthcare and Industry; Controlled Synthesis Processing and Applications of Structural and Functional Nanomaterials; and Synthesis, Properties, and Applications of Noble Metal Nanostructures. A must for academics in mechanical and chemical engineering, materials and or ceramics, and chemistry.Table of ContentsPreface vii CONTROLLED SYNTHESIS, PROCESSING AND APPLICATIONS OF STRUCTURAL AND FUNTIONAL NANOMATERIALS Effect of Annealing and Transition Metal Doping on Structural, Optical and Magnetic Properties of ZnO Nanomaterial 3 Navendu Goswami Chemical Vapor Deposition Growth of Graphene Encapsulated Palladium Nanoparticles 17 Junchi Wu and Nitin Chopra Well Adhered, Nanocrystalline, Photoactive, Ti02, Thin Films Dip-Coated On Corona-Treated Poly(Ethylene Terephthalate) by Modified Sol-Gel Processing at ~95°C and Drying at ~130°C 31 H.C. Pham, D.A.H. Hanaor, Ü.M. Cox, and C.C. Sorrell Large-Scale Synthesis of MoS2-Polymer Derived SiCN Composite Nanosheets 45 R. Bhandavat, L. David, U. Barrera, and G. Singh Synthesis of Ti02/Sn02 Bifunctional Nanocomposites 53 Huaming Yang and Chengli Huo Fabrication of Porous Mullite by Freeze Casting and Sintering of Alumina-Silica Nanoparticles 57 Wenle Li, Margaret Anderson, Kathy Lu, and John Y. Walz Low Temperature Sintering of a Gadolinium-Doped Ceria for Solid Oxide Fuel Cells 65 Pasquale F. Lavorato, and Leon L. Shaw NANOTECHNOLOGY FOR ENERGY, HEALTHCARE, AND INDUSTRY Current Status and Prospects of Nanotechnology in Arab States 79 Bassam Alfeeli, Ghada Al-Naqi, and Abeer Al-Qattan Finite Element Modeling for Mode Reduction in Bundled Sapphire Photonic Crystal Fibers 93 Neal T. Pfeiffenberger and Gary R. Pickrell p-Type Silicon Optical Fiber 103 Brian Scott, Ke Wang, Adam Floyd, and Gary Pickrell Synthesis and Characterization of Cobalt Aluminate and Fe203 Nanocomposite Electrode for Solar Driven Water Splitting to Produce Hydrogen 109 Sudhakar Shet, Kwang-Soon Ahn, Yanfa Yan, Heli Wang, Nuggehalli Ravindra, John Turner, and Mowafak Al-Jassim Influence of Substrate Temperature and RF Power on the Formation of ZnO Nanorods for Solar Driven Hydrogen Production 115 Sudhakar Shet, Heli Wang, Yanfa Yan, Nuggehalli Ravindra, John Turner, and Mowafak Al-Jassim Porous Material Fabrication using Ice Particles as a Pore Forming Agent 121 Samantha Smith and Gary Pickrell Random-Hole Optical Fiber Sensors and Their Sensing Applications 129 Ke Wang, Brian Scott, Neal Pfeiffenberger, and Gary Pickrell Wetting Properties of Silicon Incorporated DLC Films on Aluminum Substrate 135 Tae Gyu Kim, Van Cao Nguyen, Hye Sung Kim, Soon-Jik Hong, and Ri-ichi Murakami Nanoporous Ag Prepared by Electrochemical Dealloying of Melt-Spun Cu-Ag-Si Alloys 141 Guijing Li, FeiFei Lu, Linping Zhang, Zhanbo Sun, Xiaoping Song, Bingjun Ding, and Zhimao Yang Effect of Film Thickness on Electrical and Optical Properties of ZnO/Ag Dual Layer Film 149 Hiromi Yabe, Eri Akita, Pangpang Wang, Daisuke Yonekura, Ri-ichi Murakami, and Xiaoping Song Author Index 157

Read more less

Book SynopsisWith contributed papers from the 2011 Materials Science and Technology symposia, this is a useful one-stop resource for understanding the most important issues involved in the processing, properties, and applications of biomaterials science.Table of ContentsPreface ix Mechanical and Microstructural Characterization of 45S5 Bioglass® 1 Scaffolds for Tissue Engineering E. A. Aguilar-Reyes, C. A. Leon-Patino, B. Jacinto-Diaz, and L.-P. Lefebvre Next-Generation Rotary Endodontic Instruments Fabricated from 11 Special Nickel-Titanium Alloy William A. Brantley, Jie Liu, Fengyuan Zheng, Scott R. Schricker, John M. Nusstein, William AT. Clark, Libor Kovarik, Masahiro lijima, and Satish B. Alapati Preparation of Nanophase Hydroxyapatite via Self Propagating High 19 Temperature Synthesis Sophie C. Cox and Kajal K. Mallick Low Temperature Sintering of Ti-6AI-4V for Orthopedic Implant 35 Applications Kyle Crosby and Leon Shaw Cytotoxicity Evaluation of 63S Bioactive Glass Nanoparticles by 47 Microcalorimetry A. Doostmohammadi, A. Monshi, M. H. Fathi, O. Braissant, and A. U. Daniels Biological Aspects of Chemically Bonded Ca-Aluminate Based 55 Biomaterials Leif Hermansson Titanium Alloys with Changeable Young's Modulus For Preventing 65 Stress Shielding and Springback Mitsuo Niinomi, Masaaki Nakai, Junko Hieda, Xiaoli Zhao, and Xfeng Zhao Bioactive Glass in Bone Tissue Engineering 73 Mohamed N. Rahaman, Xin Liu, B. Sonny Bai, Delbert E. Day, Lianxiang Bi, and Lynda F. Bonewald Sintering of Hydroxyapatite 83 Monica Sawicki, Kyle Crosby, Ling Li, and Leon Shaw In Vivo Evaluation of 13-93 Bioactive Glass Scaffolds Made by 91 Selective Laser Sintering (SLS) M. Velez, S. Jung, K. C. R. Kolan, M. C. Leu, D. E. Day, and T-M.G. Chu Effect of Sintering Temperature on Microstructural Properties of 101 Bioceramic Bone Scaffolds Juan Vivanco, Aldo Araneda, and Heidi-Lynn Ploeg Application of Polymer-Based Microfluidic Devices for the Selection 111 and Manipulation of Low-Abundant Biological Cells Malgorzata A. Witek, Udara Dharmasiri, Samuel K. Njoroge, Morayo G. Adebiyi, Joyce W. Kamande, Mateusz L. Hupert, Francis Barany, and Steven A. Soper Laser Processed Tantalum for Implants 123 Amit Bandyopadhyay, Solaiman Tarafder, Vamsi Krishna Balla, and Susmita Bose The Role of Bacterial Attachment to Metal Substrate and Its Effects 131 on Microbiologically Influenced Corrosion (MIC) in Transporting Hydrocarbon Pipelines Faisal M. AlAbbas, Anthony Kakpovbia, David L Olson, Brajendra Mishra, and John R. Spear Electrophoretic Deposition of Soft Coatings for Orthopaedic 145 Applications Sigrid Seuss, Alejandra Chavez, Tomohiko Yoshioka, Jannik Stein, and Aldo R. Boccaccini Glutamic Acid-Biphasic Calcium Phosphates: In Vitro Bone 153 Cell-Material Interactions Solaiman Tarafder, Ian McLean, and Susmita Bose Detonation Spraying of Ti02-Ag: Controlling the Phase Composition 161 and Microstructure of the Coatings Dina V. Dudina, Sergey B. Zlobin, Vladimir Yu. Ulianitsky, Oleg I. Lomovsky, Natalia V. Bulina, Ivan A. Bataev, and Vladimir A. Bataev Si02 and SrO Doped ß-TCP: Influence of Dopants on Mechanical 171 and Biological Properties Gary Fielding, Johanna Feuerstein, Amit Bandyopadhyay, and Susmita Bose Inhibition of Low-Temperature Degradation and Biocompatibility on 183 Surface of Yttria-Stabilized Zirconia by Electric Polarization Naohiro Horiuchi, Norio Wada, Miho Nakamura, Akiko Nagai, and Kimihiro Yamashita Biomaterials for Therapeutic Gene Delivery 191 Eric N. James, Bret D. Ulery, and Lakshmi S. Nair Sol-Gel Synthesized Bio-Active Nanoporous Sodium Zirconate 213 Coating on 316L Stainless Steel for Biomedical Application K. Bavya Devi and N. Rajendran Influences of Sr, Zn and Mg Dopants on Osteoclast Differentiation 227 and Resorption Mangal Roy, Gary Fielding, and Susmita Bose A Comparitive Study of Cell Behaviors of Hydroxyapatite and 239 Ti-6AI-4V Ling Li, Kyle Crosby, Monica Sawicki, Leon L. Shaw, and Yong Wang Comparative Studies of Cold and Thermal Sprayed Hydroxyapatite 249 Coatings for Biomedical Applications—A Review Ravinder Pal Singh and Niraj Bala Injectable Biomimetic Hydrogels with Carbon Nanofibers and Novel 261 Self Assembled Chemistries for Myocardial Applications Xiangling Meng, David Stout, Linlin Sun, Hicham Fenniri, and Thomas Webster A Quantitative Method to Assess Iron Contamination Removal from 269 a Non-Ferrous Metal Surface after Passivation Sophie X. Yang, Lakshmi Sharma, and Bernice Aboud Author Index 277

Read more less

Book SynopsisWith contributed papers from the 2011 Materials Science & Technology symposia, this is a useful one-stop resource for understanding the most important issues in the advances and applications of electroceramics. Logically organized and carefully selected, the articles cover the themes of the symposia: Magnetoelectric Multiferroic Thin Films and Multilayers; Dielectric Ceramic Materials and Electronic Devices; and Multifunctional Oxide. An essential reference for government labs and academics in mechanical and chemical engineering, materials and or ceramics, and chemistry.Table of ContentsPreface ix DIELECTRIC MATERIALS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES Dielectric ll-VI and IV-VI Metal Chalcogenide Thin Films in Silver Coated Hollow Glass Waveguides (HGWS) for Infrared Spectroscopy and Laser Delivery 3 Carlos M. Bledt, Daniel V. Kopp, and James A. Harrington Dielectric Properties of Chemically Bonded Phosphate Ceramics Fabricated with Wollastonite Powders 13 H. A. Colorado, A. Wong, and J. M. Yang Equivalent Circuit Modeling of Core-Shell Structured Ceramic Materials 23 Andreja Eräte, Barbara Malic, Brigita Ku2nik, Marija Kosec, and Vid Bobnar Bi2Te3 and Bi2Te3.xSx for Thermoelectric Applications 31 W. Wong-Ng, N. Lowhorn, J. Martin, P. Zavalij, H. Joress, Q. Huang, Y. Yan, A. N. Mansour, E. L. Thomas, J. Yang, and M. L Green Optimized Sputtering Parameters for ITO Thin Films of High Conductivity and Transparency 43 Jihoon Jung and Ruyan Guo Simulation of Enhanced Optical Transmission in Piezoelctric Materials 55 Robert Mclntosh, Amar S. Bhalla, and Ruyan Guo Evolution of Microstructure Due to Additives and Processing 65 N. B. Singh, A. Berghmans, D. Knuteson, J. Talvacchio, D. Kahler, M. House, B. Schreib, B. Wagner, and M. King Comparison of the Electrical Behavior of AIN-on-Diamond and AIN-on-Si MIS Rectifying Structures 77 N. Govindaraju, D. Das, R. N. Singh, and P. B. Kosel Effect of Nanocrystalline Diamond Deposition Conditions on Si MOSFET Device Characteristics 87 N. Govindaraju, P. B. Kosel, and R. N. Singh Study of the Diffusion from Melted Erbium Salt as the Surface-Modifying Technique for Localized Erbium Doping into Various Cuts of Lithium Niobate 95 Jakub Cajzl, Pavla Nekvindova, Blanka Svecova, Jarmila Spirkova, Anna Mackova, Petr Malinsky, Jiri Vacik, Jiri Oswald, and Andreas Kolitsch Acoustic Wave Velocities Measurement on Piezoelecrtic Ceramics to Evaluate Young's Modulus and Poisson's Ratio for Realization of High Piezoelectricity 105 Toshio Ogawa and Takayuki Nishina Long-Term and Light Stimulated Evolution of Semiconductor Properties 113 Sergei Pyshkin, John Ballato, George Chumanov, Donald VanDerveer, and Raisa Zhitaru Porosification of CaO-B203-Si02 Glass-Ceramics by Selective Etching for Super-Low k LTCC 125 F. Yuan, Y. T. Shi, J. E. Mu, Z. X. He, J. H. Guo, and Y. Cao Mechanochemical Behavior of BaNd2Ti4012 Powder in Ball Milling for High k Microwave Applications 135 J. E. Mu, Y. T. Shi, F. Yuan, and J. Liu Evaluation of Electroactive Polymer (EAP) Concept to Enhance Respirator Facial Seal 147 Mark Stasik, Jay Sayre, Rachel Thurston, Wes Childers, Aaron Richardson, Megan Moore, and Paul Gardner Effect of Spark Plasma Sintering on the Dielectric Behavior of Barium Titanate Nanoparticles 161 T. Sundararajan, S. Balasivanandha Prabu, and S. Manisha Vidyavathy Relationship between Ordering Ratio and Microwave Q Factor on Indialite/Cordierite Glass Ceramics 167 Hitoshi Ohsato, Jeong-Seog Kim, Ye-Ji Lee, Chae-ll Cheon, Ki-Woong Chae, and Isao Kagomiya Dielectric Properties of Nb-Rich Potassium Lithium Tantalate Niobate Single Crystals 179 Jun Li, Yang Li, Zhongxiang Zhou, Ruyan Guo, and Amar Bhalla Electrical Properties of Calcium Titanate:Hydroxyapatite Composites 191 Madhuparna Pal, A. K. Dubey, B. Basu, R. Guo, and A. Bhalla The Influence of Consolidation Parameters on Grain Contact Surfaces BaTi03-Ceramics 199 Vojislav V. Mitic, Vladimir B. Pavlovic, Vesna Paunovic, Miroslav Miljkovic, Jelena Nedin, and Milan Dukic MAGNETOELECTRIC MULTIFERROIC THIN FILMS AND MULTILAYERS Ferroic and Structural Investigations in Rare Earth Modified TbMn03 Ceramics 209 G. S. Dias, R. A. M. Gotardo, I. A. Santos, L. F. Cotica, and J. A. Eiras, D. Garcia HR-TEM Investigations in BiFe03-PbTi03 Multifunctional Ceramics 215 V. F. Freitas, F. R. Estrada, G. S. Dias, L F. Cotica, I. A. Santos, D. Garcia and J. A. Eiras MULTIFUNTIONAL OXIDES Modified Pechini Synthesis of La Doped Hexaferrite Co2Z with High Permeability 223 Lang Qin, Nahien Sharif, Lanlin Zhang, John Volakis, and Henk Verweij Zinc Oxide (ZnO) and Bandgap Engineering for Photoeiectrochemical Splitting of Water to Produce Hydrogen 231 Sudhakar Shet, Yanfa Yan, Heli Wang, Nuggehalli Ravindra, John Turner, and Mowafak Al-Jassim Investigation of ZnO:N and ZnO:(AI,N) Films for Solar Driven Hydrogen Production 237 Sudhakar Shet, Yanfa Yan, Nuggehalli Ravindra, Heli Wang, John Turner, and Mowafak Al-Jassim Author Index 243

Read more less

Book SynopsisWith contributed papers from the 2011 Materials Science and Technology symposia, this is a useful one-stop resource for understanding the most important issues in advances in materials science for environmental and energy technologies. Logically organized and carefully selected, the articles cover the themes of the symposia: Green Technologies for Materials Manufacturing and Processing; Materials Science Challenges for Nuclear Applications; Materials for Nuclear Waste Disposal and Environmental Cleanup; Energy Conversion/Fuel Cells; and Energy Storage: Materials, Systems and Applications.Table of ContentsPreface ix GREEN TECHNOLOGIES FOR MATERIALS MANUFACTURING AND PROCESSING Mesoporous Materials For Sorption of Actinides 3 Allen W. Apblett and Zeid Al-Othman Environmentally Friendly Tin Oxide Coating through Aqueous 13 Solution Process Yoshitake Masuda, Tatsuki Ohji, and Kazumi Kato Investigation of the Morphological Change into the Fabrication of 25 ZnO Microtubes and Microrods by a Simple Liquid Process using Zn Layered Hydroxide Precursor Seiji Yamashita, M. Fuji, C. Takai, and T. Shirai Fabrication of Solid Electrolyte Dendrites through Novel Smart 33 Processing Soshu Kirihara, Satoko Tasaki, Hiroya Abe, Katsuya Noritake, and Naoki Komori Microstructural and Mechanical Properties of the Extruded a-p 41 Duplex Phase Brass Cu-40Zn-Ti Alloy H. Atsumi, H. Imai, S. Li, K. Kondoh, Y. Kousaka, and A. Kojima The Characteristics of High Strength and Lead-Free Machinable 47 a-p Duplex Phase Brass Cu-40Zn-Cr-Fe-Sn-Bi Alloy H. Atsumi, H. Imai, S. Li, K. Kondoh, Y. Kousaka, and A. Kojima Preparation of Biomass Char for Ironmaking and Its Reactivity 55 Hu Zhengwen, Zhang Jianliang, Zhang Xu, Fan Zhengyun, and Li Jing Intelligent Energy Saving System in Hot Strip Mill 65 H. Imanari, K. Ohara, K. Kitagoh, Y. Sakiyama, and F. Williams Hot Gas Cleaning with Gas-Solid Reactions and Related Materials 77 for Advanced Clean Power Generation from Coal Hiromi Shirai and Hisao Makino Polyalkylene Carbonate Polymers—A Sustainable Material Alternative 89 to Traditional Petrochemical Based Plastics P. Ferraro MATERIALS FOR NUCLEAR WASTE DISPOSAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL CLEANUP Characterizing the Defect Population Introduced by Radiation 99 Damage* Paul S. Follansbee Radiation Shielding Simulation for Wollastonite-Based Chemically 113 Bonded Phosphate Ceramics J. Pleitt, H. A. Colorado, and C. H. Castano Empirical Model for Formulation of Crystal-Tolerant HLW Glasses 121 J. Matyas, A. Huckleberry, C. A. Rodriguez, J. D. Vienna, and A. A. Kruger ENERGY CONVERSION/FUEL CELLS Novel SOFC Processing Techniques Employing Printed Materials 129 P. Khatri-Chhetri, A. Datar, and D. Cormier Manganese Cobalt Spinel Oxide Based Coatings for SOFC 141 Interconnects Jeffrey W. Fergus, Yingjia Liu, and Yu Zhao C02 Conversion into C/CO Using ODF Electrodes with SOEC 147 Bruce Kang, Huang Guo, and Gulfam Iqbal Heterofoam: New Concepts and Tools for Heterogeneous Functional 155 Material Design K. L. Reifsnider, F. Rabbi, R. Raihan, Q. Liu, P. Majumdar, Y. Du, and J. M. Adkins Study on Heteropolyacids/Ti/Zr Mixed Inorganic Composites for Fuel 165 Cell Electrolytes Uma Thanganathan ENERGY STORAGE: MATERIALS, SYSTEMS AND APPLICATIONS Fatigue Testing of Hydrogen-Exposed Austenitic Stainless Steel in 175 an Undergraduate Materials Laboratory Patrick Ferro, John Wallace, Adam Nekimken, Travis Dreyfoos, Tyler Spilker, and Elliot Marshall LiMnxFe-,_x P04 Glass and Glass-Ceramics for Lithium Ion Battery 187 Tsuyoshi Honma and Takayuki Komatsu The Absorption of Hydrogen on Low Pressure Hydride Materials 197 Gregg A. Morgan, Jr. and Paul S. Korinko Polymethylated Phenanthrenes as a Liquid Media for Hydrogen 209 Storage Mikhail Redko Author Index 221

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis publication provides an excellent one-stop resource for understanding the most important current issues in the research in processing, properties and applications in glass and optical materials. .Table of ContentsPreface ix Acknowledgments xiii PART A: THE 9TH INTERNATIONAL CONFERENCE ON ADVANCES IN THE FUSION AND PROCESSING OF GLASS FUSION OF GLASS New Concepts for Energy Efficient & Emission Friendly Melting of Glass 5Ruud Beerkens Thermal Versus Chemical Constraints for the Efficiency of Industrial Glass Melting Furnaces 25Reinhard Conradt Future of Glass Melting through the In-Flight Melting Technique 37S. Inoue, T. Watanabe, T. Yano, O. Sakamoto, K. Satoh, S. Kawachi, and T. Iseda Application of the In-Flight Melting Technology to an Alkaline Free Borosilicate Glass 45O. Sakamoto, C. Tanaka, S. Miyazaki, N. Shinohara, and S. Ohkawa Test Results of the In-Flight Glass Melting using One-Ton/Day Large Scale Experimental Melter 51Masanori Iwamoto, Keizoh Satoh, Yasunori Ebihara, Osama Sakamoto, Chikao Tanaka, and H. Segawa Energy Efficiency Simulations Using Fully Coupled and Controlled Regenerative Furnace Model 59Miroslav Trochta, Jiff Brada, and Erik Muijsenberg Strategic High Quality Quartz Supply for Fusion into Silica Glass 69Carlos K. Suzuki, Murilo F. M. Santos, Eduardo Ono, Eric Fujiwara, Delson Torikai, and Armando H. Shinohara PROCESSING AND APPLICATIONS OF GLASS Medical Interactions with Glass Packaging Surfaces 77R. G. lacocca Microstructural Phase Separation and Delamination in Glass for Pharma Applications 85Patrick K. Kreski and Arun K. Varshneya Surface and Interface Modification of Silicate Glass via Supercritical Water 91Shingo Kanehira, Kazuyuki Hirao, Takahiro Maruyama, and Tsutomu Sawano Demands and Achievements in Current Glass Container Strengthening 97C. Roos and G. Lubitz The Chemistry of Chemical Strengthening of Glass 107Arun K. Varshneya and Patrick K. Kreski A Study of Silica Glass Fiber Structure and Elastic Properties, Using Molecular Dynamics Simulations 115Laura Adkins and Alastair Cormack Effect of Glass Composition on Silanol Content: A Study of Green versus Solar Glass 125Sefina Ali and Dan Bennett Coating Methods for the Strength Increase of Containers: New Results on Nano Particle Alumina Coatings 135K. Czarnacki and J. Wasylak Effect of Ti02 Addition on the Distribution of Phosphorus Associated with Phase Separation of Borosilicate Glasses 145Y. Ohtsuki, S. Sakida, Y. Benino, and T. Nanba Glass-Ceramics from Kinescope Glass Cullet 151M. Reben, J. Wasylak, and M. Kosmal Functional and Structural Characterizations of Fresnoite Glass-Ceramics Oriented with UST Technique 161Y. Benino, A. Endo, S. Sakida, and T. Nanba Surface Tension of Bi203-B203-Si02 Glass Melts 167Chawon Hwang, Bong Ki Ryu, and Shigeru Fujino Oxidation Behavior of Nitrogen Rich AE-Si-O-N GLASSES (AE = Ca, Sr, Ba) 173Sharafat Ali and Bo Jonson PART B: STRUCTURE, PROPERTIES, AND PHOTONIC APPLICATIONS OF GLASS Tellurium Oxide Thin Film Waveguides for Integrated Photonics 181Khu T. Vu and Steve J. Madden Fabrication of Micro Structures Composed of Metallic Glasses Dispersed Oxide Glasses by Using Micro Stereolithography 187Maasa Nakano, Satoko Tasaki, and Soshu Kirihara Crystallization and Optical Loss Studies of Dy3+-Doped, Low Ga Content, Selenide Chalcogenide Bulk Glasses and Optical Fibers 193Zhuoqi Tang, David Furniss, Michael Fay, Nigel C. Neate, Slawomir Sujecki, Trevor M. Benson, and Angela B. Seddon Fabrication and Characterization of Er3+-Doped Tellurite Glass Waveguides by Ag+-Na+ Ion-Exchange Method Using a Dry Electromigration Process 201S. Sakida, K. Kimura, Y. Benino, and T. Nanba Spectral Properties of Bi-Er-Yb Triply Doped Borosilicate Glasses with 805nm Excitation 209Dong Hoon Son, Bok Hyeon Kim, Seung Ho Lee, Sang Youp Yim, and Won-Taek Han Fabrication and Estimation of Diffusion Coefficient of Pb in PbO/Ge02-Codoped Optical Fiber with Thermally Expanded Core 219Seongmin Ju, Pramod R. Watekar, Dong Hoon Son, Taejin Hwang, and Won-Taek Han Effects of Reducing Agent on Photoluminescence Properties of Copper Ion Doped Alkali Borosilicate Phase-Separated Glasses 227Fumitake Tada, Sayaka Yanagida, and Atsuo Yasumori The Role of Chemical Composition and Mean Coordination Number in Ge-As-Se Ternary Glasses 233Rong-Ping Wang, Duk Yong Choi, Steve Madden, and Barry Luther-Davies Author Index 239

Read more less

Book SynopsisIdeal as a graduate textbook, this title is aimed at helping design effective biomaterials,taking into account the complex interactions that occur at the interface when a synthetic material is inserted into a living system. Surface reactivity, biochemistry,substrates, cleaning, preparation, and coatings are presented, with numerous case studies and applications throughout. Highlights include: Starts with concepts and works up to real-life applications such as implantable devices, medical devices, prosthetics, and drug delivery technology Addresses surface reactivity, requirements for surface coating, cleaning and preparation techniques, and characterization Discusses the biological response to coatings Addresses biomaterial-tissue interaction Incorporates nanomechanical properties and processing strategies Table of ContentsChapter 1. Introduction to Biomaterials 1.1 Introduction 1.2 Summary Chapter 2. Tissue Interaction with Biomaterials 2.1 Introduction 2.2 Protein adsorption and Cell adhesion 2.3 Cell Migration 2.4 Controlled Cell Deposition 2.5 Extracellular Matrix 2.6 Biomineralization Chapter 3. Host Response of Implanted Biomaterials 3.1 Immune Response to Implanted Biomaterials 3.2 Transplant Immunology 3.3 Biocomaptibility Chapter 4. Fundamentals of Surface Modification 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Surface Properties of Biomaterials 4.3 Surface modifications 4.4 Applications Chapter 5. Multi Length Scale Hierarchy in Natural Materials 5.1 Introduction 5.2 Multi Length-scale Hierarchy 5.3 Human Bone 5.4 Turtle shell 5.5 Wood 5.6 Silk 5.7 Nacre 5.8 Gecko-feet 5.9 Lotus Leaf Chapter 6. Superhydrophobic Surfaces 6.1 Introduction 6.2 Surfaces and superhydrophobicity in nature 6.3 Classification of surfaces 6.4 Mechanics and nature of wetting 6.5 Fabrication of artificial superhydrophobic surfaces 6.6 Preparation of metallic superhydrophobic surfaces 6.7 Controlled wettability surfaces (CWS) 6.8 Conclusions Chapter 7. Surface Engineering and Modification for Biomedical Applications 7.1 Corrosion of Biomaterials and Need for Surface Coating for Biomedical Applications 7.2 Surface Reactivity and Body Cell Response 7.3 Key Requirements of Surface Coating 7.4 Key Biomaterial Substrates 7.5 Surface Preparation and Cleaning Techniques 7.6 Surface Engineering and Coating Techniques 7.7 Coatings for Biomedical Applications 7.8. Biosurface Characterization Chapter 8. Laser Engineering of Surface Structures 8.1 Introduction 8.2 Laser processing of biomaterials 8.3 Laser-based prototyping methods 8.4 Ultrafast laser pulses 8.5 Neural implants 8.6 Ophthalmic implants 8.7 Laser fabrication of cardiovascular devices 8.8 Laser-fabricated nanoscale materials 8.9 Two photon polymerization 8.10 Microneedle fabrication 8.11 Conclusions Chapter 9. Processing and Nanomechanical Properties of Hydroxyapatite-Nanotube Biocomposite 9.1 Introduction 9.2 Processing of HA-Carbon Nanotube Composites 9.3 Fracture Toughness and Tribological Properties of HA-Carbon Nanotube Composites 9.4 Adhesion of Bone Forming Cells on HA-CNT Surface 9.5 Biomechanical Compatibility at Bone/Coated Implant Interface 9.6 HA-Boron Nitride Nano Tube (BNNT) Composites 9.7 HA-TiO2 Nanotube Composites 9.8 Summary Chapter 10. Applications of Biomaterials 10.1 Multi-scale hierarchy in natural Bone 10.2 Coronary Stents 10.3 Medical Devices 10.4 Drug Delivery Chapter 11. Nanosafety, Nanosocietal and Nanoethical Issues 11.1 Governmental Environment and Health Safety Organization Protocols 11.2 Related Safety Hazards 11.3 Approach to Developing Safety Protocol for Laboratory Environment 11.4 Tendency of Nanoparticles 11.5 Current Capability of Nanoparticle Filters

Read more less

Book SynopsisAerospace propulsion devices embody some of the most advanced technologies, ranging from materials, fluid control, and heat transfer and combustion. In order to maximize the performance, sophisticated testing and computer simulation tools are developed and used.Trade ReviewNevertheless this book covers the basics in a clear and easily accessible manner and would serve as a valuable study aid and as a companion text to the number of excellent, more specialised textbooks in this area such as Gas Turbine Theoryby Savaranamutto, Rogers, Cohen and Straznicky (Prentice Hall. 2008 Sixth edition) and Space Propulsion Analysis and Designedited by R. W. Humble et al. (McGraw-Hill Publishing Company. 1995). (The Aeronautical Journal, 1 June 2014)Table of ContentsSeries Preface ix Preface xi 1 Introduction to Propulsion Systems 1 1.1 Conservation of Momentum 7 1.2 Conservation of Energy (the First Law of Thermodynamics) and Other Thermodynamic Relationships 10 1.3 One-Dimensional Gas Dynamics 13 1.4 Heat Transfer 14 1.5 Standard Atmospheric Air Properties 15 1.6 Unit Conversion 17 1.7 Problems 20 Bibliography 20 2 Principle of Thrust 21 2.1 Thrust Configurations 21 2.2 Thrust Equation 23 2.3 Basic Engine Performance Parameters 28 2.4 Propulsion and Aircraft Performance 34 2.5 Propeller Propulsion 38 2.6 MATLAB1 Program 39 2.7 Problems 40 Bibliography 42 3 Basic Analyses of Gas-Turbine Engines 43 3.1 Introduction 43 3.2 Gas-Turbine Engine as a Power Cycle (Brayton Cycle) 43 3.3 Ideal-Cycle Analysis for Turbofan Engines 49 3.4 Turbojets, Afterburners and Ramjets 61 3.5 Further Uses of Basic Engine Analysis 73 3.6 MATLAB1 Program 76 3.7 Problems 77 Bibliography 79 4 Gas-Turbine Components: Inlets and Nozzles 81 4.1 Gas-Turbine Inlets 81 4.2 Subsonic Diffuser Operation 82 4.3 Supersonic Inlet Operation 91 4.4 Gas-Turbine Nozzles 95 4.5 Problems 98 Bibliography 99 5 Compressors and Turbines 101 5.1 Introduction 101 5.2 Basic Compressor Aero-Thermodynamics 103 5.3 Radial Variations in Compressors 115 5.4 Preliminary Compressor Analysis/Design 119 5.5 Centrifugal Compressors 120 5.6 Turbine 123 5.7 MATLAB1 Programs 129 5.8 Problems 131 Bibliography 133 6 Combustors and Afterburners 135 6.1 Combustion Chambers 135 6.2 Jet Fuels and Heating Values 137 6.3 Fluid Mixing in the Combustor 141 6.4 Afterburners 149 6.5 Combustor Heat Transfer 152 6.6 Stagnation Pressure Loss in Combustors 153 6.7 Problems 155 Bibliography 157 7 Gas-Turbine Analysis with Efficiency Terms 159 7.1 Introduction 159 7.2 Turbofan Engine Analysis with Efficiency Terms 160 7.3 MATLAB1 Program 172 7.4 Problems 174 Bibliography 175 8 Basics of Rocket Propulsion 177 8.1 Introduction 177 8.2 Basic Rocketry 182 8.3 MATLAB1 Programs 189 8.4 Problems 190 Bibliography 191 9 Rocket Propulsion and Mission Analysis 193 9.1 Introduction 193 9.2 Trajectory Calculations 195 9.3 Rocket Maneuvers 203 9.4 Missile Pursuit Algorithms and Thrust Requirements 209 9.5 Problems 213 Bibliography 215 10 Chemical Rockets 217 10.1 Rocket Thrust 217 10.2 Liquid Propellant Rocket Engines 220 10.3 Solid Propellant Combustion 244 10.4 Rocket Nozzles 252 10.5 MATLAB1 Program 256 10.6 Problems 256 Bibliography 258 11 Non-Chemical Rockets 259 11.1 Electrothermal Devices 261 11.2 Ion Thrusters 265 11.3 Problems 280 Bibliography 282 Appendices 283 Appendix A: Standard Atmospheric Air Properties 283 Appendix B: Specific Heats for Air as a Function of Temperature 286 Appendix C: Normal Shock Properties 287 Appendix D: Oblique Shock Angle Chart 291 Appendix E: Polynomial Coefficients for Specific Heat of Selected Gases 292 Appendix F: Standard state Gibbs free energy 293 Index 295

Read more less

Book SynopsisA succinct guide to a Human Factors programme of work This book provides a reference for project managers to assist in identifying the key rudiments of good Human Factors design.Table of ContentsAbout the Author xiii Preface xv 1 Introduction to the Guide 1 1.1 Purpose and Scope 1 2 HF Design Process 3 2.1 Outline Design Process 3 2.2 Detailed Design Process 3 3 Workspace Human Factors 29 3.1 Outline Design Approach 29 3.2 Workspace Design and Traffic Flow 29 3.2.1 Design Outline Control Room Layout 29 3.2.2 Design Outside Gantry Access and Layout 31 3.2.3 Optimise Spatial Dimensions to Promote Good Traffic Flow 31 3.2.4 Design Outline Equipment 31 3.3 Workspace Design and Console Configuration 34 3.3.1 Design Outline Console Configurations 34 3.3.2 Design Outline Consoles 37 3.4 Workspace and Panel Design 39 3.4.1 Design Workstations and Console Layout 39 3.4.2 Design Workstations and Consoles 40 3.5 Seating 45 3.6 Mock‐ups and Example Workspaces 46 3.7 Maintenance 49 3.8 Co‐location 49 4 Human‐machine Interface Design 51 4.1 Outline Design Approach 51 4.2 HMI Operating Philosophy 51 4.3 Detailed Workstation and Console Design 52 4.3.1 Single and Multi‐Screen Workstations 53 4.4 Controls and Displays 54 4.4.1 Large Screen Displays 55 4.4.2 Interactive Large Screen Displays 56 4.4.3 Palmtops 56 4.4.4 Pagers 56 4.4.5 LOPs (Local Operating Panels) 56 4.4.6 Hardwired Controls 56 4.4.7 Fire (and Flood) Detection Panels 57 4.4.8 Fire Suppression Panel 57 4.4.9 CCTV 57 4.4.10 Printers 57 4.4.11 Reversionary Modes of Operation 57 4.5 Alerts (Alarms and Warnings) 58 4.5.1 Alerting Philosophies 58 4.5.2 Design of Alerts 60 5 Human‐computer Interface Design 69 5.1 Outline Design Approach 69 5.2 General HCI Operating Philosophy 69 5.2.1 Introduction 69 5.2.2 General HCI Design Principles 70 5.3 Detailed Design of Controls and Displays 73 5.3.1 Introduction 73 5.3.2 Functional Software Overview 74 5.3.3 Specific HCI Design and Layout Rules 74 5.3.4 Permanently Available Information 78 5.3.5 Time 78 5.3.6 Log‐on Status 78 5.3.7 Menu Button 78 5.3.8 Conditions and Threats 78 5.3.9 Command Aim Dialogue Box 79 5.3.10 Summary Alerts List 79 5.3.11 Damage Control Status Overview Mimic 79 5.3.12 Additional Permanently Available Information/Controls 79 5.3.13 Display Page Area 79 5.3.14 Primary Navigation Bar 80 5.3.15 Alert Button 80 5.3.16 Alerts 80 5.3.17 Navigation Group Buttons 81 5.3.18 System Navigation Buttons 81 5.3.19 Secondary Navigation Bars and Hyperlinks 83 5.3.20 Secondary Navigation Bars 83 5.3.21 Hyperlinks 83 5.3.22 Types of Display Page 83 5.3.23 Overview Pages 84 5.3.24 System Pages – Split Design 85 5.3.25 System Pages – Control Panel/Mimic Design 87 5.3.26 Ring Main Mimic Page 88 5.3.27 Night Colour Palette Pages 89 5.3.28 Stateboard Pages 89 5.3.29 Single Screen Navigation and Control Philosophy 89 5.3.30 Twin Screen Navigation and Control Philosophy 89 5.3.31 Large Screen Display Navigation and Control Philosophy 92 5.3.32 Paging Operating Philosophy 92 5.3.33 Palmtop HCI Operating Philosophy 92 5.4 Menus 92 5.4.1 General 92 5.5 Windows 92 5.5.1 Page Windows 92 5.5.2 Pop‐up Windows 93 5.5.3 Pop‐up Window Example 93 5.6 Controls 94 5.6.1 General Presentation 94 5.6.2 Navigation Controls 94 5.6.3 Navigation Group Buttons 94 5.6.4 System Navigation Buttons – Primary Navigation Bar 95 5.6.5 System Navigation Buttons – Secondary Navigation Bars 95 5.6.6 Hyperlinks 96 5.7 Machinery Controls 96 5.7.1 DG Start/Stop Buttons 96 5.7.2 Mode Select Controls 99 5.7.3 Breaker Controls 101 5.7.4 Valve Controls 102 5.7.5 Keyboard Controls 105 5.8 Dialogue Boxes 105 5.9 Use of Colour 105 5.9.1 General Use of Colour 105 5.9.2 Specific Uses of Colour 106 5.9.3 Colour Perception 108 5.10 Text 109 5.10.1 Font Type 109 5.10.2 Text Characteristics 110 5.11 Symbology 111 5.11.1 Marine/Systems Engineering 111 5.12 Mimics 114 5.12.1 General 114 5.12.2 Ringmain Mimics 115 5.12.3 Electrical Mimics 115 5.12.4 Propulsion Mimics 117 5.12.5 Tank Gauges 117 5.12.6 Animation 120 5.13 Touch Screens 120 5.14 Day and Night Viewing Conditions 122 5.14.1 Night Viewing Palettes 122 5.15 Workload and Automation 124 5.15.1 Workload 124 5.15.2 Automation and De‐skilling 126 5.15.2.1 Anecdotal Evidence 126 5.15.2.2 Balancing Automation between the Human and the Machine 129 5.15.2.3 Key HF Issues in Addressing Automation 131 6 Environmental Ergonomics 133 6.1 Outline 133 6.2 Lighting 133 6.3 Noise 134 6.4 Heating and Ventilation 136 6.5 Platform Motion 136 7 Training 139 7.1 Outline 139 7.2 Training Needs Analysis and Specification 140 7.3 Training Equipment 140 7.4 Summary Approach to Training 141 8 Assessment and Acceptance Testing 143 8.1 Method 143 8.2 Acceptance Testing and Human Factors 143 8.3 Control Room HF Design Process and Acceptance Planning 144 8.4 Acceptance Testing Detail 144 8.4.1 Static Assessments 148 8.4.2 Dynamic Assessments 149 8.4.2.1 Detailed Dynamic Assessment Example 152 References 155 Index 157

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive introduction and up-to-date reference to SiC power semiconductor devices covering topics from material properties to applications Based on a number of breakthroughs in SiC material science and fabrication technology in the 1980s and 1990s, the first SiC Schottky barrier diodes (SBDs) were released as commercial products in 2001.Trade Review“Students or working professionals interested in SiC technology will find this book worth reading.” (IEEE Electrical Insulation Magazine, 1 November 2015) “If you have any interest in the now emerging SiC semiconductor devices, this book covers it all and in sufficient depth to answer questions that might arise from process engineers, device modelers, or power - circuits and systems designers. It really is the book to have on SiC, and because of its breadth as well as depth, would be a good supplement to solid - state physics or electronics books, device design or SPICE modeling, or to provide a solid foundation for circuit design with SiC devices.” (How2Power.com, 1 March 2015)Table of ContentsAbout the Authors xi Preface xiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Progress in Electronics 1 1.2 Features and Brief History of Silicon Carbide 3 1.2.1 Early History 3 1.2.2 Innovations in SiC Crystal Growth 4 1.2.3 Promise and Demonstration of SiC Power Devices 5 1.3 Outline of This Book 6 References 6 2 Physical Properties of Silicon Carbide 11 2.1 Crystal Structure 11 2.2 Electrical and Optical Properties 16 2.2.1 Band Structure 16 2.2.2 Optical Absorption Coefficient and Refractive Index 18 2.2.3 Impurity Doping and Carrier Density 20 2.2.4 Mobility 23 2.2.5 Drift Velocity 27 2.2.6 Breakdown Electric Field Strength 28 2.3 Thermal and Mechanical Properties 30 2.3.1 Thermal Conductivity 30 2.3.2 Phonons 31 2.3.3 Hardness and Mechanical Properties 32 2.4 Summary 32 References 33 3 Bulk Growth of Silicon Carbide 39 3.1 Sublimation Growth 39 3.1.1 Phase Diagram of Si-C 39 3.1.2 Basic Phenomena Occurring during the Sublimation (Physical Vapor Transport) Method 39 3.1.3 Modeling and Simulation 44 3.2 Polytype Control in Sublimation Growth 46 3.3 Defect Evolution and Reduction in Sublimation Growth 50 3.3.1 Stacking Faults 50 3.3.2 Micropipe Defects 51 3.3.3 Threading Screw Dislocation 53 3.3.4 Threading Edge Dislocation and Basal Plane Dislocation 54 3.3.5 Defect Reduction 57 3.4 Doping Control in Sublimation Growth 59 3.4.1 Impurity Incorporation 59 3.4.2 n-Type Doping 61 3.4.3 p-Type Doping 61 3.4.4 Semi-Insulating 62 3.5 High-Temperature Chemical Vapor Deposition 64 3.6 Solution Growth 66 3.7 3C-SiC Wafers Grown by Chemical Vapor Deposition 67 3.8 Wafering and Polishing 67 3.9 Summary 69 References 69 4 Epitaxial Growth of Silicon Carbide 75 4.1 Fundamentals of SiC Homoepitaxy 75 4.1.1 Polytype Replication in SiC Epitaxy 75 4.1.2 Theoretical Model of SiC Homoepitaxy 78 4.1.3 Growth Rate and Modeling 83 4.1.4 Surface Morphology and Step Dynamics 87 4.1.5 Reactor Design for SiC Epitaxy 89 4.2 Doping Control in SiC CVD 90 4.2.1 Background Doping 90 4.2.2 n-Type Doping 91 4.2.3 p-Type Doping 92 4.3 Defects in SiC Epitaxial Layers 93 4.3.1 Extended Defects 93 4.3.2 Deep Levels 102 4.4 Fast Homoepitaxy of SiC 105 4.5 SiC Homoepitaxy on Non-standard Planes 107 4.5.1 SiC Homoepitaxy on Nearly On-Axis {0001} 107 4.5.2 SiC Homoepitaxy on Non-basal Planes 108 4.5.3 Embedded Homoepitaxy of SiC 110 4.6 SiC Homoepitaxy by Other Techniques 110 4.7 Heteroepitaxy of 3C-SiC 111 4.7.1 Heteroepitaxial Growth of 3C-SiC on Si 111 4.7.2 Heteroepitaxial Growth of 3C-SiC on Hexagonal SiC 114 4.8 Summary 114 References 115 5 Characterization Techniques and Defects in Silicon Carbide 125 5.1 Characterization Techniques 125 5.1.1 Photoluminescence 126 5.1.2 Raman Scattering 134 5.1.3 Hall Effect and Capacitance–Voltage Measurements 136 5.1.4 Carrier Lifetime Measurements 137 5.1.5 Detection of Extended Defects 142 5.1.6 Detection of Point Defects 150 5.2 Extended Defects in SiC 155 5.2.1 Major Extended Defects in SiC 155 5.2.2 Bipolar Degradation 156 5.2.3 Effects of Extended Defects on SiC Device Performance 161 5.3 Point Defects in SiC 165 5.3.1 Major Deep Levels in SiC 165 5.3.2 Carrier Lifetime Killer 174 5.4 Summary 179 References 180 6 Device Processing of Silicon Carbide 189 6.1 Ion Implantation 189 6.1.1 Selective Doping Techniques 190 6.1.2 Formation of an n-Type Region by Ion Implantation 191 6.1.3 Formation of a p-Type Region by Ion Implantation 197 6.1.4 Formation of a Semi-Insulating Region by Ion Implantation 200 6.1.5 High-Temperature Annealing and Surface Roughening 201 6.1.6 Defect Formation by Ion Implantation and Subsequent Annealing 203 6.2 Etching 208 6.2.1 Reactive Ion Etching 208 6.2.2 High-Temperature Gas Etching 211 6.2.3 Wet Etching 212 6.3 Oxidation and Oxide/SiC Interface Characteristics 212 6.3.1 Oxidation Rate 213 6.3.2 Dielectric Properties of Oxides 215 6.3.3 Structural and Physical Characterization of Thermal Oxides 217 6.3.4 Electrical Characterization Techniques and Their Limitations 219 6.3.5 Properties of the Oxide/SiC Interface and Their Improvement 234 6.3.6 Interface Properties of Oxide/SiC on Various Faces 241 6.3.7 Mobility-Limiting Factors 244 6.4 Metallization 248 6.4.1 Schottky Contacts on n-Type and p-Type SiC 249 6.4.2 Ohmic Contacts to n-Type and p-Type SiC 255 6.5 Summary 262 References 263 7 Unipolar and Bipolar Power Diodes 277 7.1 Introduction to SiC Power Switching Devices 277 7.1.1 Blocking Voltage 277 7.1.2 Unipolar Power Device Figure of Merit 280 7.1.3 Bipolar Power Device Figure of Merit 281 7.2 Schottky Barrier Diodes (SBDs) 282 7.3 pn and pin Junction Diodes 286 7.3.1 High-Level Injection and the Ambipolar Diffusion Equation 288 7.3.2 Carrier Densities in the “i” Region 290 7.3.3 Potential Drop across the “i” Region 292 7.3.4 Current–Voltage Relationship 293 7.4 Junction-Barrier Schottky (JBS) and Merged pin-Schottky (MPS) Diodes 296 References 300 8 Unipolar Power Switching Devices 301 8.1 Junction Field-Effect Transistors (JFETs) 301 8.1.1 Pinch-Off Voltage 302 8.1.2 Current–Voltage Relationship 303 8.1.3 Saturation Drain Voltage 304 8.1.4 Specific On-Resistance 305 8.1.5 Enhancement-Mode and Depletion-Mode Operation 308 8.1.6 Power JFET Implementations 311 8.2 Metal-Oxide-Semiconductor Field-Effect Transistors (MOSFETs) 312 8.2.1 Review of MOS Electrostatics 312 8.2.2 MOS Electrostatics with Split Quasi-Fermi Levels 315 8.2.3 MOSFET Current–Voltage Relationship 316 8.2.4 Saturation Drain Voltage 319 8.2.5 Specific On-Resistance 319 8.2.6 Power MOSFET Implementations: DMOSFETs and UMOSFETs 320 8.2.7 Advanced DMOSFET Designs 321 8.2.8 Advanced UMOS Designs 324 8.2.9 Threshold Voltage Control 326 8.2.10 Inversion Layer Electron Mobility 329 8.2.11 Oxide Reliability 339 8.2.12 MOSFET Transient Response 342 References 350 9 Bipolar Power Switching Devices 353 9.1 Bipolar Junction Transistors (BJTs) 353 9.1.1 Internal Currents 353 9.1.2 Gain Parameters 355 9.1.3 Terminal Currents 357 9.1.4 Current–Voltage Relationship 359 9.1.5 High-Current Effects in the Collector: Saturation and Quasi-Saturation 360 9.1.6 High-Current Effects in the Base: the Rittner Effect 366 9.1.7 High-Current Effects in the Collector: Second Breakdown and the Kirk Effect 368 9.1.8 Common Emitter Current Gain: Temperature Dependence 370 9.1.9 Common Emitter Current Gain: the Effect of Recombination 371 9.1.10 Blocking Voltage 373 9.2 Insulated-Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBTs) 373 9.2.1 Current–Voltage Relationship 374 9.2.2 Blocking Voltage 384 9.2.3 Switching Characteristics 385 9.2.4 Temperature Dependence of Parameters 391 9.3 Thyristors 392 9.3.1 Forward Conducting Regime 393 9.3.2 Forward Blocking Regime and Triggering 398 9.3.3 The Turn-On Process 404 9.3.4 dV/dt Triggering 406 9.3.5 The dI/dt Limitation 407 9.3.6 The Turn-Off Process 407 9.3.7 Reverse-Blocking Mode 415 References 415 10 Optimization and Comparison of Power Devices 417 10.1 Blocking Voltage and Edge Terminations for SiC Power Devices 417 10.1.1 Impact Ionization and Avalanche Breakdown 418 10.1.2 Two-Dimensional Field Crowding and Junction Curvature 423 10.1.3 Trench Edge Terminations 424 10.1.4 Beveled Edge Terminations 425 10.1.5 Junction Termination Extensions (JTEs) 427 10.1.6 Floating Field-Ring (FFR) Terminations 429 10.1.7 Multiple-Floating-Zone (MFZ) JTE and Space-Modulated (SM) JTE 432 10.2 Optimum Design of Unipolar Drift Regions 435 10.2.1 Vertical Drift Regions 435 10.2.2 Lateral Drift Regions 438 10.3 Comparison of Device Performance 440 References 443 11 Applications of Silicon Carbide Devices in Power Systems 445 11.1 Introduction to Power Electronic Systems 445 11.2 Basic Power Converter Circuits 446 11.2.1 Line-Frequency Phase-Controlled Rectifiers and Inverters 446 11.2.2 Switch-Mode DC–DC Converters 450 11.2.3 Switch-Mode Inverters 453 11.3 Power Electronics for Motor Drives 458 11.3.1 Introduction to Electric Motors and Motor Drives 458 11.3.2 dc Motor Drives 459 11.3.3 Induction Motor Drives 460 11.3.4 Synchronous Motor Drives 465 11.3.5 Motor Drives for Hybrid and Electric Vehicles 468 11.4 Power Electronics for Renewable Energy 471 11.4.1 Inverters for Photovoltaic Power Sources 471 11.4.2 Converters for Wind Turbine Power Sources 472 11.5 Power Electronics for Switch-Mode Power Supplies 476 11.6 Performance Comparison of SiC and Silicon Power Devices 481 References 486 12 Specialized Silicon Carbide Devices and Applications 487 12.1 Microwave Devices 487 12.1.1 Metal-Semiconductor Field-Effect Transistors (MESFETs) 487 12.1.2 Static Induction Transistors (SITs) 489 12.1.3 Impact Ionization Avalanche Transit-Time (IMPATT) Diodes 496 12.2 High-Temperature Integrated Circuits 497 12.3 Sensors 499 12.3.1 Micro-Electro-Mechanical Sensors (MEMS) 499 12.3.2 Gas Sensors 500 12.3.3 Optical Detectors 504 References 509 Appendix A Incomplete Dopant Ionization in 4H-SiC 511 References 515 Appendix B Properties of the Hyperbolic Functions 517 Appendix C Major Physical Properties of Common SiC Polytypes 521 C. 1 Properties 521 C. 2 Temperature and/or Doping Dependence of Major Physical Properties 522 References 523 Index 525

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn advanced level introductory book covering fundamental aspects, design and dynamics of electric and hybrid electric vehicles There is significant demand for an understanding of the fundamentals, technologies, and design of electric and hybrid electric vehicles and their components from researchers, engineers, and graduate students. Although there is a good body of work in the literature, there is still a great need for electric and hybrid vehicle teaching materials. Electric and Hybrid Vehicles: Technologies, Modeling and Control A Mechatronic Approach is based on the authors' current research in vehicle systems and will include chapters on vehicle propulsion systems, the fundamentals of vehicle dynamics, EV and HEV technologies, chassis systems, steering control systems, and state, parameter and force estimations. The book is highly illustrated, and examples will be given throughout the book based on real applications and challenges in the automotive industrTrade Review“This is a valuable resource for libraries serving upper-level undergraduate engineering students and practicing professionals in automotive-related industries. Summing Up: Highly recommended. Upper-level undergraduates and above.” (Choice, 1 December 2014) Table of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgments xv 1 Introduction to Vehicle Propulsion and Powertrain Technologies 1 1.1 History of Vehicle Development 1 1.2 Internal Combustion Engine Vehicles (ICEVs) 3 1.3 Vehicle Emission Control Technologies 16 1.4 Vehicles with Alternative Fuels 25 1.5 Powertrain Technologies 29 1.6 Transmission Systems 32 1.7 Drivetrain and Differentials 41 2 Electric and Hybrid Powertrain Technologies 47 2.1 Introduction 47 2.2 Battery Electric Vehicles (BEVs) 48 2.3 Fuel-Cell Electric Vehicles (FCEVs) 65 2.4 Hybrid Electric Vehicles 71 2.5 Plug-in Hybrid Electric Vehicles (PHEVs) 85 2.6 Hybrid Hydraulic Vehicles (HHVs) 87 2.7 Pneumatic Hybrid Vehicles (PHVs) 89 2.8 Power/Energy Management Systems 91 2.9 Summary 92 3 Body and Chassis Technologies 95 3.1 Introduction 95 3.2 General Configuration of Automobiles 95 3.3 Body and Chassis Fundamentals 97 3.4 Different Types of Structural Systems 101 3.5 Body and Chassis Materials 108 3.6 Specific Considerations in Body and Chassis Design of Electric and Hybrid Electric Vehicles 110 3.7 The Chassis Systems of Electric and Hybrid Electric Vehicles 126 4 Vehicle Dynamics Fundamentals 149 4.1 Introduction 149 4.2 Concepts and Terminology 149 4.3 Vehicle Kinematics 152 4.4 Tire Mechanics and Modeling 170 5 Modelling and Characteristics of EV/HEV Powertrains Components 181 5.1 Introduction 181 5.2 ICE Performance Characteristics 182 5.3 Electric Motor Performance Characteristics 195 5.4 Battery Performance Characteristics 214 5.5 Transmission and Drivetrain Characteristics 223 5.6 Regenerative Braking Characteristics 233 5.7 Driving Cycles 236 6 Modeling and Analysis of Electric and Hybrid Electric Vehicles' Propulsion and Braking 245 6.1 Introduction 245 6.2 The Longitudinal Dynamics Equation of Motion 246 6.3 Vehicle Propulsion Modeling and Analysis 247 6.4 Vehicle Braking Modeling and Analysis 268 7 Handling Analysis of Electric and Hybrid Electric Vehicles 277 7.1 Introduction 277 7.2 Simplified Handling Models 277 7.3 Comprehensive Handling Model of EVs and HEVs 298 8 Energy/Power Allocation and Management 313 8.1 Introduction 313 8.2 Power/Energy Management Controllers 314 8.3 Rule-Based Control Strategies 315 8.4 Optimization-Based Control Strategies 337 9 Control of Electric and Hybrid Electric Vehicle Dynamics 367 9.1 Introduction 367 9.2 Fundamentals of Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) Systems 368 9.3 VDC Implementation on Electric and Hybrid Vehicles 389 Problems 408 References 409 Index 411

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis comprehensive collection of practical residual stress measurement techniques is written by world-renowned experts in their respective fields. It provides the reader with the information needed to understand key concepts and to make informed technical decisions.Table of ContentsList of Contributors xv Preface xvii 1 Overview of Residual Stresses and Their Measurement 1Gary S. Schajer and Clayton O. Ruud 1.1 Introduction 1 1.1.1 Character and Origin of Residual Stresses 1 1.1.2 Effects of Residual Stresses 3 1.1.3 Residual Stress Gradients 4 1.1.4 Deformation Effects of Residual Stresses 5 1.1.5 Challenges of Measuring Residual Stresses 6 1.1.6 Contribution of Modern Measurement Technologies 7 1.2 Relaxation Measurement Methods 7 1.2.1 Operating Principle 7 1.3 Diffraction Methods 13 1.3.1 Measurement Concept 13 1.3.2 X-ray Diffraction 14 1.3.3 Synchrotron X-ray 15 1.3.4 Neutron Diffraction 15 1.4 Other Methods 16 1.4.1 Magnetic 16 1.4.2 Ultrasonic 17 1.4.3 Thermoelastic 17 1.4.4 Photoelastic 18 1.4.5 Indentation 18 1.5 Performance and Limitations of Methods 18 1.5.1 General Considerations 18 1.5.2 Performance and Limitations of Methods 19 1.6 Strategies for Measurement Method Choice 19 1.6.1 Factors to be Considered 19 1.6.2 Characteristics of Methods 24 References 24 2 Hole Drilling and Ring Coring 29Gary S. Schajer and Philip S. Whitehead 2.1 Introduction 29 2.1.1 Introduction and Context 29 2.1.2 History 30 2.1.3 Deep Hole Drilling 31 2.2 Data Acquisition Methods 31 2.2.1 Strain Gages 31 2.2.2 Optical Measurement Techniques 33 2.3 Specimen Preparation 35 2.3.1 Specimen Geometry and Strain Gage Selection 35 2.3.2 Surface Preparation 38 2.3.3 Strain Gage Installation 40 2.3.4 Strain Gage Wiring 40 2.3.5 Instrumentation and Data Acquisition 41 2.4 Hole Drilling Procedure 42 2.4.1 Drilling Cutter Selection 42 2.4.2 Drilling Machines 43 2.4.3 Orbital Drilling 44 2.4.4 Incremental Measurements 45 2.4.5 Post-drilling Examination of Hole and Cutter 46 2.5 Computation of Uniform Stresses 47 2.5.1 Mathematical Background 47 2.5.2 Data Averaging 49 2.5.3 Plasticity Effects 50 2.5.4 Ring Core Measurements 50 2.5.5 Optical Measurements 50 2.5.6 Orthotropic Materials 50 2.6 Computation of Profile Stresses 51 2.6.1 Mathematical Background 51 2.7 Example Applications 54 2.7.1 Shot-peened Alloy Steel Plate – Application of the Integral Method 54 2.7.2 Nickel Alloy Disc – Fine Increment Drilling 54 2.7.3 Titanium Test-pieces – Surface Processes 56 2.7.4 Coated Cylinder Bore – Adaptation of the Integral Method 57 2.8 Performance and Limitations of Methods 57 2.8.1 Practical Considerations 57 2.8.2 Common Uncertainty Sources 58 2.8.3 Typical Measurement Uncertainties 59 References 61 3 Deep Hole Drilling 65David J. Smith 3.1 Introduction and Background 65 3.2 Basic Principles 68 3.2.1 Elastic Analysis 68 3.2.2 Effects of Plasticity 71 3.3 Experimental Technique 72 3.4 Validation of DHD Methods 75 3.4.1 Tensile Loading 75 3.4.2 Shrink Fitted Assembly 77 3.4.3 Prior Elastic–plastic Bending 78 3.4.4 Quenched Solid Cylinder 79 3.5 Case Studies 80 3.5.1 Welded Nuclear Components 80 3.5.2 Components for the Steel Rolling Industry 82 3.5.3 Fibre Composites 82 3.6 Summary and Future Developments 83 Acknowledgments 84 References 85 4 The Slitting Method 89Michael R. Hill 4.1 Measurement Principle 89 4.2 Residual Stress Profile Calculation 90 4.3 Stress Intensity Factor Determination 96 4.4 Practical Measurement Procedures 96 4.5 Example Applications 99 4.6 Performance and Limitations of Method 101 4.7 Summary 106 References 106 5 The Contour Method 109Michael B. Prime and Adrian T. DeWald 5.1 Introduction 109 5.1.1 Contour Method Overview 109 5.1.2 Bueckner’s Principle 110 5.2 Measurement Principle 110 5.2.1 Ideal Theoretical Implementation 110 5.2.2 Practical Implementation 110 5.2.3 Assumptions and Approximations 112 5.3 Practical Measurement Procedures 114 5.3.1 Planning the Measurement 114 5.3.2 Fixturing 114 5.3.3 Cutting the Part 115 5.3.4 Measuring the Surfaces 116 5.4 Residual Stress Evaluation 117 5.4.1 Basic Data Processing 117 5.4.2 Additional Issues 120 5.5 Example Applications 121 5.5.1 Experimental Validation and Verification 121 5.5.2 Unique Measurements 127 5.6 Performance and Limitations of Methods 130 5.6.1 Near Surface (Edge) Uncertainties 130 5.6.2 Size Dependence 131 5.6.3 Systematic Errors 131 5.7 Further Reading On Advanced Contour Method Topics 133 5.7.1 Superposition For Additional Stresses 133 5.7.2 Cylindrical Parts 134 5.7.3 Miscellaneous 134 5.7.4 Patent 134 Acknowledgments 134 References 135 6 Applied and Residual Stress Determination Using X-ray Diffraction 139Conal E. Murray and I. Cevdet Noyan 6.1 Introduction 139 6.2 Measurement of Lattice Strain 141 6.3 Analysis of Regular dφψ vs. sin2ψ Data 143 6.3.1 D¨olle-Hauk Method 143 6.3.2 Winholtz-Cohen Least-squares Analysis 143 6.4 Calculation of Stresses 145 6.5 Effect of Sample Microstructure 146 6.6 X-ray Elastic Constants (XEC) 149 6.6.1 Constitutive Equation 150 6.6.2 Grain Interaction 151 6.7 Examples 153 6.7.1 Isotropic, Biaxial Stress 153 6.7.2 Triaxial Stress 154 6.7.3 Single-crystal Strain 156 6.8 Experimental Considerations 159 6.8.1 Instrumental Errors 159 6.8.2 Errors Due to Counting Statistics and Peak-fitting 159 6.8.3 Errors Due to Sampling Statistics 159 6.9 Summary 160 Acknowledgments 160 References 160 7 Synchrotron X-ray Diffraction 163Philip Withers 7.1 Basic Concepts and Considerations 163 7.1.1 Introduction 163 7.1.2 Production of X-rays; Undulators, Wigglers, and Bending Magnets 166 7.1.3 The Historical Development of Synchrotron Sources 167 7.1.4 Penetrating Capability of Synchrotron X-rays 169 7.2 Practical Measurement Procedures and Considerations 169 7.2.1 Defining the Strain Measurement Volume and Measurement Spacing 170 7.2.2 From Diffraction Peak to Lattice Spacing 173 7.2.3 From Lattice Spacing to Elastic Strain 173 7.2.4 From Elastic Strain to Stress 178 7.2.5 The Precision of Diffraction Peak Measurement 179 7.2.6 Reliability, Systematic Errors and Standardization 180 7.3 Angle-dispersive Diffraction 184 7.3.1 Experimental Set-up, Detectors, and Data Analysis 184 7.3.2 Exemplar: Mapping Stresses Around Foreign Object Damage 186 7.3.3 Exemplar: Fast Strain Measurements 187 7.4 Energy-dispersive Diffraction 188 7.4.1 Experimental Set-up, Detectors, and Data Analysis 189 7.4.2 Exemplar: Crack Tip Strain Mapping at High Spatial Resolution 189 7.4.3 Exemplar: Mapping Stresses in Thin Coatings and Surface Layers 190 7.5 New Directions 191 7.6 Concluding Remarks 192 References 193 8 Neutron Diffraction 195Thomas M. Holden 8.1 Introduction 195 8.1.1 Measurement Concept 195 8.1.2 Neutron Technique 196 8.1.3 Neutron Diffraction 196 8.1.4 3-Dimensional Stresses 198 8.1.5 Neutron Path Length 198 8.2 Formulation 199 8.2.1 Determination of the Elastic Strains from the Lattice Spacings 199 8.2.2 Relationship between the Measured Macroscopic Strain in a given Direction and the Elements of the Strain Tensor 199 8.2.3 Relationship between the Stress σi,j and Strain εi,j Tensors 200 8.3 Neutron Diffraction 201 8.3.1 Properties of the Neutron 201 8.3.2 The Strength of the Diffracted Intensity 202 8.3.3 Cross Sections for the Elements 203 8.3.4 Alloys 204 8.3.5 Differences with Respect to X-rays 205 8.3.6 Calculation of Transmission 205 8.4 Neutron Diffractometers 206 8.4.1 Elements of an Engineering Diffractometer 206 8.4.2 Monochromatic Beam Diffraction 206 8.4.3 Time-of-flight Diffractometers 209 8.5 Setting up an Experiment 210 8.5.1 Choosing the Beam-defining Slits or Radial Collimators 210 8.5.2 Calibration of the Wavelength and Effective Zero of the Angle Scale, 2θ0 210 8.5.3 Calibration of a Time-of-flight Diffractometer 210 8.5.4 Positioning the Sample on the Table 211 8.5.5 Measuring Reference Samples 211 8.6 Analysis of Data 211 8.6.1 Monochromatic Beam Diffraction 211 8.6.2 Analysis of Time-of-flight Diffraction 212 8.6.3 Precision of the Measurements 213 8.7 Systematic Errors in Strain Measurements 213 8.7.1 Partly Filled Gage Volumes 213 8.7.2 Large Grain Effects 214 8.7.3 Incorrect Use of Slits 214 8.7.4 Intergranular Effects 215 8.8 Test Cases 215 8.8.1 Stresses in Indented Discs; Neutrons, Contour Method and Finite Element Modeling 215 8.8.2 Residual Stress in a Three-pass Bead-in-slot Weld 218 Acknowledgments 221 References 221 9 Magnetic Methods 225David J. Buttle 9.1 Principles 225 9.1.1 Introduction 225 9.1.2 Ferromagnetism 226 9.1.3 Magnetostriction 226 9.1.4 Magnetostatic and Magneto-elastic Energy 227 9.1.5 The Hysteresis Loop 228 9.1.6 An Introduction to Magnetic Measurement Methods 228 9.2 Magnetic Barkhausen Noise (MBN) and Acoustic Barkhausen Emission (ABE) 229 9.2.1 Introduction 229 9.2.2 Measurement Depth and Spatial Resolution 230 9.2.3 Measurement 232 9.2.4 Measurement Probes and Positioning 233 9.2.5 Calibration 233 9.3 The MAPS Technique 235 9.3.1 Introduction 235 9.3.2 Measurement Depth and Spatial Resolution 237 9.3.3 MAPS Measurement 238 9.3.4 Measurement Probes and Positioning 239 9.3.5 Calibration 240 9.4 Access and Geometry 243 9.4.1 Space 243 9.4.2 Edges, Abutments and Small Samples 244 9.4.3 Weld Caps 244 9.4.4 Stranded Wires 244 9.5 Surface Condition and Coatings 244 9.6 Issues of Accuracy and Reliability 245 9.6.1 Magnetic and Stress History 245 9.6.2 Materials and Microstructure 246 9.6.3 Magnetic Field Variability 248 9.6.4 Probe Stand-off and Tilt 248 9.6.5 Temperature 249 9.6.6 Electric Currents 250 9.7 Examples of Measurement Accuracy 250 9.8 Example Measurement Approaches for MAPS 252 9.8.1 Pipes and Small Positive and Negative Radii Curvatures 252 9.8.2 Rapid Measurement from Vehicles 252 9.8.3 Dealing with ‘Poor’ Surfaces in the Field 253 9.9 Example Applications with ABE and MAPS 253 9.9.1 Residual Stress in α Welded Plate 253 9.9.2 Residual Stress Evolution During Fatigue in Rails 253 9.9.3 Depth Profiling in Laser Peened Spring Steel 254 9.9.4 Profiling and Mapping in Ring and Plug Test Sample 254 9.9.5 Measuring Multi-stranded Structure for Wire Integrity 255 9.10 Summary and Conclusions 256 References 257 10 Ultrasonics 259Don E. Bray 10.1 Principles of Ultrasonic Stress Measurement 259 10.2 History 264 10.3 Sources of Uncertainty in Travel-time Measurements 265 10.3.1 Surface Roughness 265 10.3.2 Couplant 265 10.3.3 Material Variations 265 10.3.4 Temperature 265 10.4 Instrumentation 266 10.5 Methods for Collecting Travel-time 266 10.5.1 Fixed Probes with Viscous Couplant 267 10.5.2 Fixed Probes with Immersion 267 10.5.3 Fixed Probes with Pressurization 270 10.5.4 Contact with Freely Rotating Probes 270 10.6 System Uncertainties in Stress Measurement 270 10.7 Typical Applications 271 10.7.1 Weld Stresses 271 10.7.2 Measure Stresses in Pressure Vessels and Other Structures 272 10.7.3 Stresses in Ductile Cast Iron 273 10.7.4 Evaluate Stress Induced by Peening 273 10.7.5 Measuring Stress Gradient 273 10.7.6 Detecting Reversible Hydrogen Attack 273 10.8 Challenges and Opportunities for Future Application 274 10.8.1 Personnel Qualifications 274 10.8.2 Establish Acoustoelastic Coefficients (L11) for Wider Range of Materials 274 10.8.3 Develop Automated Integrated Data Collecting and Analyzing System 274 10.8.4 Develop Calibration Standard 274 10.8.5 Opportunities for LCR Applications in Engineering Structures 274 References 275 11 Optical Methods 279Drew V. Nelson 11.1 Holographic and Electronic Speckle Interferometric Methods 279 11.1.1 Holographic Interferometry and ESPI Overview 279 11.1.2 Hole Drilling 282 11.1.3 Deflection 285 11.1.4 Micro-ESPI and Holographic Interferometry 286 11.2 Moiré Interferometry 286 11.2.1 Moiré Interferometry Overview 286 11.2.2 Hole Drilling 287 11.2.3 Other Approaches 289 11.2.4 Micro-Moiré 289 11.3 Digital Image Correlation 290 11.3.1 Digital Image Correlation Overview 290 11.3.2 Hole Drilling 291 11.3.3 Micro/Nano-DIC Slotting, Hole Drilling and Ring Coring 292 11.3.4 Deflection 293 11.4 Other Interferometric Approaches 294 11.4.1 Shearography 294 11.4.2 Interferometric Strain Rosette 294 11.5 Photoelasticity 294 11.6 Examples and Applications 295 11.7 Performance and Limitations 295 References 298 Further Reading 302 Index 303

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents the latest advances in complex-valued neural networks by demonstrating the theory in a wide range of applications Complex-valued neural networks is a rapidly developing neural network framework that utilizes complex arithmetic, exhibiting specific characteristics in its learning, self-organizing, and processing dynamics. They are highly suitable for processing complex amplitude, composed of amplitude and phase, which is one of the core concepts in physical systems to deal with electromagnetic, light, sonic/ultrasonic waves as well as quantum waves, namely, electron and superconducting waves. This fact is a critical advantage in practical applications in diverse fields of engineering, where signals are routinely analyzed and processed in time/space, frequency, and phase domains. Complex-Valued Neural Networks: Advances and Applications covers cutting-edge topics and applications surrounding this timely subject. Demonstrating advanced theories withTrade Review“In summary, this book contains a wide variety of hot topics on advanced computational intelligence methods which incorporate the concept of complex and hypercomplex number systems into the framework of artificial neural networks . . . Nevertheless, it seems that the applications of CVNNs and hypercomplex-valued neural networks are very promising.” (IEEE Computational intelligence magazine, 1 May 2013)Table of ContentsPreface xv 1 Application Fields and Fundamental Merits 1Akira Hirose 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Applications of Complex-Valued Neural Networks 2 1.3 What is a complex number? 5 1.4 Complex numbers in feedforward neural networks 8 1.5 Metric in complex domain 12 1.6 Experiments to elucidate the generalization characteristics 16 1.7 Conclusions 26 2 Neural System Learning on Complex-Valued Manifolds 33Simone Fiori 2.1 Introduction 34 2.2 Learning Averages over the Lie Group of Unitary Matrices 35 2.3 Riemannian-Gradient-Based Learning on the Complex Matrix-Hypersphere 41 2.4 Complex ICA Applied to Telecommunications 49 2.5 Conclusion 53 3 N-Dimensional Vector Neuron and Its Application to the N-Bit Parity Problem 59Tohru Nitta 3.1 Introduction 59 3.2 Neuron Models with High-Dimensional Parameters 60 3.3 N-Dimensional Vector Neuron 65 3.4 Discussion 69 3.5 Conclusion 70 4 Learning Algorithms in Complex-Valued Neural Networks using Wirtinger Calculus 75Md. Faijul Amin and Kazuyuki Murase 4.1 Introduction 76 4.2 Derivatives in Wirtinger Calculus 78 4.3 Complex Gradient 80 4.4 Learning Algorithms for Feedforward CVNNs 82 4.5 Learning Algorithms for Recurrent CVNNs 91 4.6 Conclusion 99 5 Quaternionic Neural Networks for Associative Memories 103Teijiro Isokawa, Haruhiko Nishimura, and Nobuyuki Matsui 5.1 Introduction 104 5.2 Quaternionic Algebra 105 5.3 Stability of Quaternionic Neural Networks 108 5.4 Learning Schemes for Embedding Patterns 124 5.5 Conclusion 128 6 Models of Recurrent Clifford Neural Networks and Their Dynamics 133Yasuaki Kuroe 6.1 Introduction 134 6.2 Clifford Algebra 134 6.3 Hopfield-Type Neural Networks and Their Energy Functions 137 6.4 Models of Hopfield-Type Clifford Neural Networks 139 6.5 Definition of Energy Functions 140 6.6 Existence Conditions of Energy Functions 142 6.7 Conclusion 149 7 Meta-cognitive Complex-valued Relaxation Network and its Sequential Learning Algorithm 153Ramasamy Savitha, Sundaram Suresh, and Narasimhan Sundararajan 7.1 Meta-cognition in Machine Learning 154 7.2 Meta-cognition in Complex-valued Neural Networks 156 7.3 Meta-cognitive Fully Complex-valued Relaxation Network 164 7.4 Performance Evaluation of McFCRN: Synthetic Complexvalued Function Approximation Problem 171 7.5 Performance Evaluation of McFCRN: Real-valued Classification Problems 172 7.6 Conclusion 178 8 Multilayer Feedforward Neural Network with Multi-Valued Neurons for Brain-Computer Interfacing 185Nikolay V. Manyakov, Igor Aizenberg, Nikolay Chumerin, and Marc M. Van Hulle 8.1 Brain-Computer Interface (BCI) 185 8.2 BCI Based on Steady-State Visual Evoked Potentials 188 8.3 EEG Signal Preprocessing 192 8.4 Decoding Based on MLMVN for Phase-Coded SSVEP BCI 196 8.5 System Validation 201 8.6 Discussion 203 9 Complex-Valued B-Spline Neural Networks for Modeling and Inverse of Wiener Systems 209Xia Hong, Sheng Chen and Chris J. Harris 9.1 Introduction 210 9.2 Identification and Inverse of Complex-Valued Wiener Systems 211 9.3 Application to Digital Predistorter Design 222 9.4 Conclusions 229 10 Quaternionic Fuzzy Neural Network for View-invariant Color Face Image Recognition 235Wai Kit Wong, Gin Chong Lee, Chu Kiong Loo, Way Soong Lim, and Raymond Lock 10.1 Introduction 236 10.2 Face Recognition System 238 10.3 Quaternion-Based View-invariant Color Face Image Recognition 244 10.4 Enrollment Stage and Recognition Stage for Quaternion- Based Color Face Image Correlator 255 10.5 Max-Product Fuzzy Neural Network Classifier 260 10.6 Experimental Results 266 10.7 Conclusion and Future Research Directions 274 References 274 Index 279

Read more less

Book SynopsisMotion control is widely used in all types of industries including packaging, assembly, textile, paper, printing, food processing, wood products, machinery, electronics and semiconductor manufacturing. Industrial motion control applications use specialized equipment and require system design and integration. To design such systems, engineers need to be familiar with industrial motion control products; be able to bring together control theory, kinematics, dynamics, electronics, simulation, programming and machine design; apply interdisciplinary knowledge; and deal with practical application issues. The book is intended to be an introduction to the topic for senior level undergraduate mechanical and electrical engineering students. It should also be resource for system design engineers, mechanical engineers, electrical engineers, project managers, industrial engineers, manufacturing engineers, product managers, field engineers, and programmers in industry.Table of ContentsPreface ix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Components of a Motion Control System 3 1.1.1 Human–Machine Interface 3 1.1.2 Motion Controller 4 1.1.3 Drives 6 1.1.4 Actuators 7 1.1.5 Transmission Mechanisms 7 1.1.6 Feedback 7 References 9 2 Motion Profile 11 2.1 Kinematics: Basic Concepts 11 2.2 Common Motion Profiles 15 2.2.1 Trapezoidal Velocity Profile 15 2.2.2 S-curve Velocity Profile 21 2.3 Multiaxis Motion 28 2.3.1 Slew Motion 28 2.3.2 Interpolated Motion 29 Problems 30 References 34 3 Drive-Train Design 35 3.1 Inertia and Torque Reflection 36 3.1.1 Gearbox Ratio 36 3.1.2 Reflected Inertia 38 3.1.3 Reflected Torque 39 3.1.4 Efficiency 39 3.1.5 Total Inertia 40 3.2 Inertia Ratio 41 3.2.1 Targeted Practical Inertia Ratio 43 3.3 Transmission Mechanisms 43 3.3.1 Load and Inertia Reflection through Transmission Mechanisms 44 3.3.2 Pulley-and-Belt 45 3.3.3 Lead Screw 47 3.3.4 Rack-and-Pinion Drive 52 3.3.5 Belt-Drive for Linear Motion 53 3.3.6 Conveyor 54 3.4 Torque Required for the Motion 56 3.4.1 Acceleration (Peak) Torque 57 3.4.2 Running Torque 57 3.4.3 Deceleration Torque 58 3.4.4 Continuous (RMS) Torque 58 3.5 Motor Torque–Speed Curves 62 3.5.1 Torque–Speed Curves for AC Servomotors 63 3.5.2 Torque–Speed Curves for AC Induction Motors 64 3.6 Motor Sizing Process 67 3.7 Motor Selection for Direct Drive 68 3.8 Motor and Transmission Selection 69 3.9 Gearboxes 72 3.9.1 Planetary Servo Gearheads 72 3.9.2 Worm Gear Speed Reducers 73 3.10 Servo Motor and Gearhead Selection 75 3.11 AC Induction Motor and Gearbox Selection 89 3.12 Motor, Gearbox, and Transmission Mechanism Selection 96 Problems 100 References 105 4 Electric Motors 107 4.1 Underlying Concepts 107 4.1.1 Electrical and Mechanical Cycles 109 4.1.2 Three-Phase Windings 110 4.2 Rotating Magnetic Field 110 4.2.1 Hall Sensors 110 4.2.2 Six-Step Commutation 111 4.3 AC Servo Motors 114 4.3.1 Rotor 114 4.3.2 Stator 115 4.3.3 Sinusoidal Commutation 119 4.3.4 Torque Generation with Sinusoidal Commutation 123 4.3.5 Six-Step Commutation of AC Servo Motors 124 4.3.6 Motor Phasing with Encoders and Hall Sensors 125 4.4 AC Induction Motors 126 4.4.1 Stator 126 4.4.2 Rotor 127 4.4.3 Motor Operation 128 4.4.4 Constant Speed Operation Directly Across-the-Line 129 4.4.5 Variable Speed Operation with a VFD 131 4.5 Mathematical Models 132 4.5.1 AC Servo Motor Model 134 4.5.2 AC Induction Motor Model 140 Problems 145 References 146 5 Sensors and Control Devices 148 5.1 Optical Encoders 148 5.1.1 Incremental Encoder 149 5.1.2 SinCos Encoders 152 5.1.3 Absolute Encoder 154 5.1.4 Serial Encoder Communications 157 5.1.5 Velocity Estimation 160 5.2 Detection Sensors 162 5.2.1 Limit Switches 162 5.2.2 Proximity Sensors 162 5.2.3 Photoelectric Sensors 163 5.2.4 Ultrasonic Sensors 164 5.2.5 The Concept of Sinking and Sourcing 165 5.2.6 Three-Wire Sensors 167 5.3 Pilot Control Devices 168 5.3.1 Push Buttons 169 5.3.2 Selector Switches 170 5.3.3 Indicator Lights 170 5.4 Control Devices for AC Induction Motors 171 5.4.1 Motor Control Circuit 172 Problems 174 References 175 6 AC Drives 177 6.1 Drive Electronics 177 6.1.1 Converter and DC Link 178 6.1.2 Inverter 180 6.2 Basic Control Structures 188 6.2.1 Cascaded Velocity and Position Loops 188 6.2.2 Single-Loop PID Position Control 192 6.2.3 Cascaded Loops with Feedforward Control 201 6.3 Inner Loop 207 6.3.1 Inner Loop for AC Induction Motors 209 6.3.2 Inner Loop for AC Servo Motors 210 6.4 Simulation Models of Controllers 210 6.4.1 Simulation Model for Vector Control of an AC Induction Motor 211 6.4.2 Simulation Model for Vector Control of an AC Servo Motor 215 6.5 Tuning 215 6.5.1 Tuning a PI Controller 219 6.5.2 Tuning a PID Position Controller 223 6.5.3 Tuning a Cascaded Velocity/Position Controller with Feedforward Gains 232 Problems 242 References 245 7 Motion Controller Programming and Applications 247 7.1 Move Modes 247 7.1.1 Linear Moves 248 7.1.2 Circular Moves 248 7.1.3 Contour Moves 248 7.2 Programming 249 7.2.1 Motion Programs 250 7.2.2 PLC Functionality 250 7.3 Single-Axis Motion 253 7.3.1 Jogging 254 7.3.2 Homing 254 7.4 Multiaxis Motion 256 7.4.1 Multiple Motors Driving One Axis 256 7.4.2 Coordinated Motion of Two or More Axes 257 7.4.3 Following Using Master/Slave Synchronization 258 7.4.4 Tension Control 273 7.4.5 Kinematics 278 Problems 284 References 288 Appendix A Overview of Control Theory 289 A.1 System Configurations 289 A.2 Analysis Tools 289 A.2.1 Transfer Functions 291 A.2.2 Block Diagrams 292 A.3 Transient Response 293 A.3.1 First-Order System Response 293 A.3.2 Second-Order System Response 293 A.4 Steady-State Errors 297 References 298 Index 299

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents a systematic view of vibro-impact dynamics based on the nonlinear dynamics analysis Comprehensive understanding of any vibro-impact system is critically impeded by the lack of analytical tools viable for properly characterizing grazing bifurcation. The authors establish vibro-impact dynamics as a subset of the theory of discontinuous systems, thus enabling all vibro-impact systems to be explored and characterized for applications. Vibro-impact Dynamics presents an original theoretical way of analyzing the behavior of vibro-impact dynamics that can be extended to discontinuous dynamics. All topics are logically integrated to allow for vibro-impact dynamics, the central theme, to be presented.It provides a unified treatment on the topic with a sound theoretical base that is applicable to both continuous and discrete systems Vibro-impact Dynamics: Presents mapping dynamics to determine bifurcation and chaos in vibro-impactTrade Review"It provides a unified treatment on the topic with a sound theoretical base that is applicable to both continuous and discrete systems." (Zentralblatt MATH, 2016) Table of ContentsPreface Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1.1. Discrete and discontinuous systems 1 1.1.1 Discrete dynamical systems 2 1.1.2 Discontinuous dynamical systems 4 1.2 Fermi oscillator and impact problems 8 1.3 book layout 10 References 12 Chapter 2 Nonlinear Discrete Systems 19 2.1 Defintions 19 2.2 Fixed points and stability 21 2.3 Stability switching theory 34 2.4. Bifurcation theory 50 References 59 Chapter 3 Complete Dynamics and Fractality 61 3.1 Complete dynamics of discrete systems 61 3.2 Routes to chaos 69 3.2.1 One-dimensional maps 69 3.2.2 Two-dimensional maps 73 3.3 Complete Dynamics of Henon map 75 3.4 Simliarity and Multifractals 81 3.4.1 Similar Structures in period doubling 81 3.4.2 Fractality of chaos via PD bifurcation 86 3.4.3 An example 86 3.5 Complete dynamics of Logistic map 93 References 107 Chapter 4 Discontinuous Dynamical Systems 109 4.1 Basic concepts 109 4.2 G-functions 112 4.3 Passable flows 116 4.4 Non-passable flows 121 4.5 Grazing flows 135 4.6 Flow switching bifucations 149 References 162 Chapter 5 Nonlinear Dynamics of Bouncing Balls 163 5.1 Analytical dynamics of bouncing balls 163 5.1.1 Periodic motions 165 5.1.1 Stability and bifurcations 168 5.1.3 Numerical illustrations 175 5.2 Period-m motions 180 5.3 Complex dynamics 187 5.4 Complex periodic motions 192 References 200 Chapter 6 Complex Dynamics of Impact Pairs 201 6.1 Impact pairs 201 6.2 Analytical, simplest periodic motions 205 6.3 Possible impact notion sequences 216 6.4 Grazing dynamics and stick motions 220 6.5 Mapping structures and periodic motions 228 6.6 Stabilityand bifurcation 232 References 242 Chapter 7 Nonlinear Dynamics of Fermi Oscillators 243 7.1 Mapping dynamics 243 7.2 A Fermi oscillator 249 7.2.1 Absolute description 251 7.2.2 Relative description 257 7.3 Analytical conditions 258 7.4 Mapping structures and motions 260 7.4.1 Switching sets and generic mappings 260 7.4.2 Motions with mapping structures 263 7.4.3 Periodic motion and local stability 265 7.5 Predictions and similations 268 7.5.1 Bifurcation scenarios 268 7.5.2 Analytical predictions 271 7.5.3 Numberical illustractions 278 7.6 Appendix 291 References 295 Subject index 297

Read more less

Book SynopsisSystemic thinking is the process of understanding how systems influence one another within a world of systems and has been defined as an approach to problem solving by viewing problems as parts of an overall system, rather than reacting to a specific part, outcome, or event. This book provides a complete overview of systemic thinking, exploring a framework and graphical technique for understanding and identifying new ways to more efficiently solve problems and create solutions. Demystifying the conjunction of systems concepts and systemic diagramming techniques, this comprehensive pocket guide introduces and explains the basis of systemigrams, how to create a systemigram and a SystemiShow, illuminates multiple complex problems, and provides an overview of what purpose they serve for today''s industry professionals. Systemic Thinking: Building Maps for Worlds of Systems: Includes illustrative systemigrams and case studies Includes the SystemTable of ContentsLIST OF SYSTEMIGRAMS ix LIST OF FIGURES xiii LIST OF TABLES xv ACKNOWLEDGMENTS xvii JOURNEY I SYSTEMIC FAILURE 1 1 WHERE WE START FROM 3 2 SYSTEMIC INTRODUCTION 6 3 RAINING ON MY CASCADE 11 4 IT’S THE WHOLE, STUPID! 16 5 THE ANSWER IS . . . PIONEER ACORN PANCAKES? 23 JOURNEY II SYSTEMIC IDEAS: THE CONCEPTAGON 29 6 FRAMEWORKS 31 7 THE CONCEPTAGON 35 8 BOUNDARIES, INTERIORS, AND EXTERIORS 38 9 PARTS, RELATIONSHIPS, AND WHOLES 46 10 INPUTS, OUTPUTS, AND TRANSFORMATIONS 57 11 CONTROL, COMMAND, AND COMMUNICATION 62 12 STRUCTURE, PROCESS, AND FUNCTION 76 13 VARIETY, PARSIMONY, AND HARMONY 86 14 OPENNESS, HIERARCHY, AND EMERGENCE 93 JOURNEY III SYSTEMIC MAPS: SYSTEMIGRAMS 99 15 WHAT . . . ? 101 16 WHY . . . ? 120 17 WHEN . . . ? 140 18 HOW . . . ? 158 19 WHO . . . ? 183 20 WHERE . . . ? 204 21 TO ARRIVE WHERE WE STARTED 233 REFERENCES 236 INDEX 238

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides readers with a one-stop entry into the chemistry of varied hybrids and applications, from a molecular synthetic standpoint Describes introduction and effect of organic structures on specific support components (carbon-based materials, proteins, metals, and polymers). Chapters cover hot topics including nanodiamonds, nanocrystals, metal-organic frameworks, peptide bioconjugates, and chemoselective protein modification Describes analytical techniques, with pros and cons, to validate synthetic strategies Edited by internationally-recognized chemists from different backgrounds (synthetic polymer chemistry, inorganic surfaces and particles, and synthetic organic chemistry) to pull together diverse perspectives and approachesTable of ContentsPreface vii Contributors ix 1 COVALENT ORGANIC FUNCTIONALIZATION AND CHARACTERIZATION OF CARBON NANOTUBES 1 Cécilia Ménard-Moyon 2 FUNCTIONALIZED GRAPHENES 36 Iban Azcarate, David Lachkar, Emmanuel Lacôte, Jennifer Lesage de la Haye, and Anne-Laure Vallet 3 NANODIAMONDS: EMERGENCE OF FUNCTIONALIZED DIAMONDOIDS AND THEIR UNIQUE APPLICATIONS 69 Maria A. Gunawan, Paul Kahl, Didier Poinsot, Bruno Domenichini, Peter R. Schreiner, Andrey A. Fokin, and Jean-Cyrille Hierso 4 TITANIA-BASED HYBRID MATERIALS: FROM MOLECULAR PRECURSORS TO THE CONTROLLED DESIGN OF HIERARCHICAL HYBRID MATERIALS 114 Laurence Rozes, Loïc D’Arras, Chloé Hoffman, François Potier, Niki Halttunen, and Lionel Nicole 5 FUNCTIONALIZATION OF ZIRCONIUM OXIDE SURFACES 168 Marc Petit and Julien Monot 6 FUNCTIONAL METAL–ORGANIC FRAMEWORKS: SYNTHESIS AND REACTIVITY 200 Flavien L. Morel, Xiaoying Xu, Marco Ranocchiari, and Jeroen A. van Bokhoven 7 SURFACE CHEMISTRY OF COLLOIDAL SEMICONDUCTOR NANOCRYSTALS: ORGANIC, INORGANIC, AND HYBRID 233 Richard Brutchey, Zeger Hens, and Maksym V. Kovalenko 8 COVALENT ORGANIC FUNCTIONALIZATION OF NUCLEIC ACIDS 272 Michel Arthur and Mélanie Etheve-Quelquejeu 9 CHEMOSELECTIVE PROTEIN MODIFICATIONS: METHODS AND APPLICATIONS FOR THE FUNCTIONALIZATION OF VIRAL CAPSIDS 299 Divya Agrawal and Christian P. R. Hackenberger 10 CYCLODEXTRINS–METAL HYBRIDS 349 Maxime Guitet, Mickaël Ménand, and Matthieu Sollogoub 11 POST-FUNCTIONALIZATION OF POLYMERS VIA ORTHOGONAL LIGATION CHEMISTRY 395 Anja S. Goldmann, M. Glassner, Andrew J. Inglis, and Christopher Barner-Kowollik 12 POLYMER–PROTEIN/PEPTIDE BIOCONJUGATES 466 Paul Wilson, Julien Nicolas, and David M. Haddleton 13 HYBRID MATERIALS BUILT FROM (PHOSPHORUS) DENDRIMERS 503 Anne-Marie Caminade, Beatrice Delavaux-Nicot, and Jean-Pierre Majoral Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisA timely and comprehensive introduction to CO2 heat pump theory and usage A comprehensive introduction of CO2 application in heat pump, authored by leading scientists in the field CO2 is a hot topic due to concerns over global warming and the ''greenhouse effect''. Its disposal and application has attracted considerable research and governmental interest Explores the basic theories, devices, systems and cycles and real application designs for varying applications, ensuring comprehensive coverage of a current topic CO2 heat transfer has everyday applications including water heaters, air-conditioning systems, residential and commercial heating systems, and cooling systems Table of ContentsList of Contributors Preface Chapter 1 Introduction 1.1 Background 1.2 Fundamentals 1.3 Applications 1.4 A guide to this book Chapter 2 Current development of CO2 heat pump 2.1 Introduction 2.2 CO2 properties 2.3 Working principle of transcritical CO2 heat pump 2.4 A brief history of CO2 heat pump 2.5 CO2 cascade heat pump system 2.6 Advanced CO2 heat pump system with an ejector Chapter 3 Fluid Dynamics and Heat Transfer of Supercritical Carbon Dioxide Cooling 3.1 Supercritical properties 3.2 Supercritical heat transfer fluid mechanics 3.3 Supercritical gas cooling experiments 3.4 Supercritical CO2 heat transfer correlations 3.5 Supercritical CO2 pressure drop 3.6 Supercritical CO2 heat transfer and pressure drop with lubricants 3.7 Summary and need for additional research Chapter 4 Boiling flow and heat transfer of CO2 in an evaporator 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Boiling heat transfer of liquid CO2 in an evaporator 4.3 Sublimation heat ransfer of dry ice-gas CO2 in an evaporator/sublimator Chapter 5 Theoretical analysis of CO2 expansion process 5.1 Introduction 5.2 Thermodynamic analysis of the expansion process in transcritical CO2 cycles 5.3 Theory of ejector-expansion devices 5.4 Expansion work recovery devices for transcritical CO2 systems Chapter 6 Trans-critical carbon dioxide compressors 6.1 Introduction 6.2 Sliding vane CO2 compressor 6.3 Screw CO2 compressor 6.4 CO2 rolling rotor compressor 6.5 SCO2 scroll compressor 6.6 SCO2 turbo-compressor 6.7 SCO2 piston compressor 6.8 Future trends 6.9 Some key technical problems of CO2 compressor 6.10 Conclusion and perspectives Chapter 7 CO2 subcooling 7.1 Introduction 7.2 CO2 thermodynamic properties and approach 7.3 Internal heat exchanger 7.4 Dedicated mechanical subcooling 7.5 Integrated mechanical subcooling 7.6 Summary Chapter 8 High temperature CO2 heat pump system and optimization 8.1 Background 8.2 Basic system design 8.3 High temperature operation and key equipment 8.4 System Optimization 8.5 Applications and challenges 8.6 Commercialized Products by High Temperature CO2 Heat Pump 8.7 Summary Chapter 9 Performance Analysis and Optimization of a CO2 Heat Pump Water Heating System 9.1 Introduction 9.2 System configuration 9.3 System modeling 9.4 Numerical solution 9.5 Conditions for performance analysis and optimization 9.6 Performance analysis under periodically steady state 9.7 Performance enhancement by extracting tepid water 9.8 Performance analysis under unsteady state 9.9 Performance estimation under unsteady state 9.10 Performance optimization under unsteady state 9.11 Other issues on performance analysis and optimization Chapter 10 Transcritical CO2 heat pump space heating 10.1 Attempts towards the space heating used a transcritical CO2 heat pump 10.2 Thermodynamic analysis of the subcooler based CO2 heat pump 10.3 Comparison between the subcooler based CO2 system and the cascade cycle 10.4 Optimal discharge pressure 10.5 Optimal medium temperature 10.6 Conclusion and prospect References

Read more less

Book SynopsisPerformance of the Jet Transport Airplane: Analysis Methods, Flight Operations, and Regulations presents a detailed and comprehensive treatment of performance analysis techniques for jet transport airplanes.Table of ContentsForeword xi Series Preface xiii Acknowledgments xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Definitions of Performance 1 1.2 Commercial Air Transportation 3 1.3 Jet Transport Airplanes: A Short History 4 1.4 Regulatory Framework 8 1.5 Performance-Related Activities 9 1.6 Analysis Techniques and Idealizations 12 References 14 2 Engineering Fundamentals 17 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 Notation, Units, and Conversion Factors 18 2.3 Mass, Momentum, Weight, and Gravity 21 2.4 Basics of Rigid Body Dynamics 26 2.5 Basics of Fluid Dynamics 33 2.6 Further Reading 43 References 43 3 Aerodynamic Fundamentals 45 3.1 Introduction 45 3.2 Standard Definitions and Notation 45 3.3 Coordinate Systems and Conventions 53 3.4 Aerodynamic Forces and Moments 55 3.5 Compressibility 63 3.6 Boundary Layers 65 3.7 High Lift Devices 67 3.8 Controls for Pitch, Roll, and Yaw 71 3.9 Further Reading 75 References 75 4 Atmosphere and Weather 77 4.1 Introduction 77 4.2 International Standard Atmosphere 77 4.3 Non-Standard and Off-Standard Atmospheres 85 4.4 The Real Atmosphere 89 4.5 Weather 91 4.6 Stability of the Atmosphere 96 References 98 5 Height Scales and Altimetry 5.1 Introduction 101 5.2 Height Scales 101 5.3 Altimetry 104 5.4 Flight Levels, Tracks, and Airspace 111 References 114 6 Distance and Speed 115 6.1 Introduction 115 6.2 Distance 115 6.3 True Airspeed, Ground Speed, and Navigation 118 6.4 Speed of Sound and Mach Number 120 6.5 Dynamic Pressure and Equivalent Airspeed 121 6.6 Calibrated Airspeed 122 6.7 Indicated Airspeed 127 6.8 Relationship Between Airplane Speeds 128 References 130 7 Lift and Drag 131 7.1 Introduction 131 7.2 Airplane Lift 132 7.3 Airplane Drag 137 7.4 Drag Polar 143 7.5 Drag Polar Corrections 150 7.6 Lift-to-Drag Ratio 158 7.7 Minimum Drag Condition 162 7.8 Minimum Drag Power (Required Power) Condition 164 7.9 Minimum Drag-to-Speed Ratio Condition 166 7.10 Summary of Expressions Based on the Parabolic Drag Polar 169 References 171 8 Propulsion 175 8.1 Introduction 175 8.2 Basic Description of the Turbofan Engine 176 8.3 Engine Thrust 184 8.4 Fuel Flow and Thrust Specific Fuel Consumption 190 8.5 Thrust Control, Engine Design Limits, and Ratings 194 8.6 Thrust Variation 202 8.7 Fuel Flow and TSFC Variation 209 8.8 Installation Losses and Engine Deterioration 212 8.9 Further Reading 217 References 218 9 Takeoff Performance 221 9.1 Introduction 221 9.2 Takeoff Distances 222 9.3 Forces Acting on the Airplane During the Ground Run 227 9.4 Evaluation of the Takeoff Distance from Brake Release to Rotation 232 9.5 Rotation and Climb-Out to Clear the Screen Height 238 9.6 Empirical Estimation of Takeoff Distances 241 9.7 Evaluation of Rejected Takeoff Runway Distances 244 9.8 Wheel Braking 247 9.9 Takeoff on Contaminated Runways 252 References 255 10 Takeoff Field Length and Takeoff Climb Considerations 257 10.1 Introduction 257 10.2 Takeoff Reference Speeds 258 10.3 Takeoff Weight Limitations 261 10.4 Runway Limitations and Data 265 10.5 Operational Field Length and Runway-Limited Takeoff Weight 268 10.6 Takeoff Climb Gradient Requirements 272 10.7 Takeoff Climb Obstacle Clearance 274 10.8 Derated Thrust and Reduced Thrust Takeoff 277 References 280 11 Approach and Landing 283 11.1 Introduction 283 11.2 Procedure for Approach and Landing 284 11.3 Forces Acting on the Airplane During the Ground Run 287 11.4 Landing Distance Estimation 291 11.5 Empirical Estimation of the Landing Distance 297 11.6 Landing on Contaminated Runways 298 11.7 Flight Operations 300 11.8 Rejected Landing 307 References 308 12 Mechanics of Level, Climbing, and Descending Flight 311 12.1 Introduction 311 12.2 Basic Equations of Motion 312 12.3 Performance in Level Flight 315 12.4 Performance in Climbing Flight 319 12.5 Performance in Descending Flight 334 12.6 Further Reading 337 References 338 13 Cruising Flight and Range Performance 339 13.1 Introduction 339 13.2 Specific Air Range and Still Air Range Determination 340 13.3 Analytical Integration 345 13.4 Numerical Integration 351 13.5 Cruise Optimization Based on Aerodynamic Parameters 354 13.6 Best Cruise Speeds and Cruise Altitudes 360 13.7 Further Details on the Use of the Bre´guet Range Equation 363 13.8 Influence of Wind on Cruise Performance 366 References 370 14 Holding Flight and Endurance Performance 373 14.1 Introduction 373 14.2 Basic Equation for Holding/Endurance 374 14.3 Analytical Integration 375 14.4 Numerical Integration 378 14.5 Flight Conditions for Maximum Endurance 379 14.6 Holding Operations 382 References 384 15 Mechanics of Maneuvering Flight 385 15.1 Introduction 385 15.2 Turning Maneuvers 386 15.3 Level Coordinated Turns 389 15.4 Climbing or Descending Turns 396 15.5 Level Uncoordinated Turns 398 15.6 Limits and Constraints in Turning Maneuvers 400 15.7 Pitching Maneuvers 403 15.8 Total Energy 404 References 409 16 Trip Fuel Requirements and Estimation 411 16.1 Introduction 411 16.2 ICAO Requirements 412 16.3 FAA Requirements 412 16.4 EASA Requirements 414 16.5 Trip Fuel Computational Procedure 416 16.6 Payload–Range Performance 418 16.7 Trip Fuel Breakdown and Fuel Fractions 422 16.8 Trip Fuel Estimation 424 16.9 Estimating Trip Distances (To Be Flown) 428 16.10 Transporting (Tankering) Fuel 429 16.11 Reclearance 430 16.12 Factors That Can Impact Cruise Fuel 432 16.13 Impact of Small Changes on Cruise Fuel 435 References 437 17 En Route Operations and Limitations 439 17.1 Introduction 439 17.2 Climb to Initial Cruise Altitude (En Route Climb) 440 17.3 Cruise Altitude Selection 443 17.4 En Route Engine Failure 446 17.5 En Route Cabin Pressurization Failure 450 17.6 Extended Operations 451 17.7 Continuous Descent Operations 454 References 455 18 Cost Considerations 457 18.1 Introduction 457 18.2 Airplane Operating Costs 458 18.3 Cost Index 461 18.4 Unit Energy Cost 468 References 474 19 Weight, Balance, and Trim 477 19.1 Introduction 477 19.2 Airplane Weight Definitions 477 19.3 Center of Gravity 481 19.4 Longitudinal Static Stability and Stabilizer Trim 485 19.5 Center of Gravity Control 490 19.6 Operational Weights and Dispatch Procedures 491 19.7 Performance Implications 494 References 496 20 Limitations and Flight Envelope 497 20.1 Introduction 497 20.2 Stall 497 20.3 High-Speed Buffet 502 20.4 Altitude–Speed Limitations 505 20.5 Key Regulatory Speeds 507 20.6 Structural Design Loads and Limitations 510 20.7 V–n Diagram (Flight Load Envelope) 512 References 520 21 Noise and Emissions 523 21.1 Introduction 523 21.2 Airplane Noise 523 21.3 Noise Regulations and Restrictions 526 21.4 Noise Abatement and Flight Operations 530 21.5 Airplane Emissions 532 21.6 Mitigating the Effects of Airplane Emissions 537 References 540 22 Airplane Systems and Performance 543 22.1 Introduction 543 22.2 Reliability Requirements for Airplane Systems 543 22.3 Cabin Pressurization System 544 22.4 Environmental Control System 548 22.5 De-Icing and Anti-Icing Systems 549 22.6 Auxiliary Power System 550 22.7 Fuel and Fuel Systems 551 References 559 23 Authorities, Regulations, and Documentation 563 23.1 Introduction 563 23.2 International Civil Aviation Organization 563 23.3 Aviation Authorities 565 23.4 Regulations, Certification, and Operations 567 23.5 Safety Investigation Authorities 571 23.6 Non-Governmental Organizations 572 23.7 Airplane and Flight Crew Documentation 573 23.8 Airplane Performance Data 577 References 578 A International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) Table 583 B Units and Conversion Factors 591 C Coordinate Systems and Conventions 597 D Miscellaneous Derivations 601 E Trim and Longitudinal Static Stability 613 F Regulations (Fuel Policy) 627 G Abbreviations and Nomenclature 629 Index 645

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn introductory approach to the subject of large strains and large displacements in finite elements. Large Strain Finite Element Method: A Practical Course, takes an introductory approach to the subject of large strains and large displacements in finite elements and starts from the basic concepts of finite strain deformability, including finite rotations and finite displacements. The necessary elements of vector analysis and tensorial calculus on the lines of modern understanding of the concept of tensor will also be introduced. This book explains how tensors and vectors can be described using matrices and also introduces different stress and strain tensors. Building on these, step by step finite element techniques for both hyper and hypo-elastic approach will be considered. Material models including isotropic, unisotropic, plastic and viscoplastic materials will be independently discussed to facilitate clarity and ease of learning. Elements of traTable of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgements xv PART ONE FUNDAMENTALS 1 1 Introduction 3 1.1 Assumption of Small Displacements 3 1.2 Assumption of Small Strains 6 1.3 Geometric Nonlinearity 6 1.4 Stretches 8 1.5 Some Examples of Large Displacement Large Strain Finite Element Formulation 8 1.6 The Scope and Layout of the Book 13 1.7 Summary 13 2 Matrices 15 2.1 Matrices in General 15 2.2 Matrix Algebra 16 2.3 Special Types of Matrices 21 2.4 Determinant of a Square Matrix 22 2.5 Quadratic Form 24 2.6 Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors 24 2.7 Positive Definite Matrix 26 2.8 Gaussian Elimination 26 2.9 Inverse of a Square Matrix 28 2.10 Column Matrices 30 2.11 Summary 32 3 Some Explicit and Iterative Solvers 35 3.1 The Central Difference Solver 35 3.2 Generalized Direction Methods 43 3.3 The Method of Conjugate Directions 50 3.4 Summary 63 4 Numerical Integration 65 4.1 Newton-Cotes Numerical Integration 65 4.2 Gaussian Numerical Integration 67 4.3 Gaussian Integration in 2D 70 4.4 Gaussian Integration in 3D 71 4.5 Summary 72 5 Work of Internal Forces on Virtual Displacements 75 5.1 The Principle of Virtual Work 75 5.2 Summary 78 PART TWO PHYSICAL QUANTITIES 79 6 Scalars 81 6.1 Scalars in General 81 6.2 Scalar Functions 81 6.3 Scalar Graphs 82 6.4 Empirical Formulas 82 6.5 Fonts 83 6.6 Units 83 6.7 Base and Derived Scalar Variables 85 6.8 Summary 85 7 Vectors in 2D 87 7.1 Vectors in General 87 7.2 Vector Notation 91 7.3 Matrix Representation of Vectors 91 7.4 Scalar Product 92 7.5 General Vector Base in 2D 93 7.6 Dual Base 94 7.7 Changing Vector Base 95 7.8 Self-duality of the Orthonormal Base 97 7.9 Combining Bases 98 7.10 Examples 104 7.11 Summary 108 8 Vectors in 3D 109 8.1 Vectors in 3D 109 8.2 Vector Bases 111 8.3 Summary 114 9 Vectors in n-Dimensional Space 117 9.1 Extension from 3D to 4-Dimensional Space 117 9.2 The Dual Base in 4D 118 9.3 Changing the Base in 4D 120 9.4 Generalization to n-Dimensional Space 121 9.5 Changing the Base in n-Dimensional Space 124 9.6 Summary 127 10 First Order Tensors 129 10.1 The Slope Tensor 129 10.2 First Order Tensors in 2D 131 10.3 Using First Order Tensors 132 10.4 Using Different Vector Bases in 2D 134 10.5 Differential of a 2D Scalar Field as the First Order Tensor 137 10.6 First Order Tensors in 3D 141 10.7 Changing the Vector Base in 3D 142 10.8 First Order Tensor in 4D 143 10.9 First Order Tensor in n-Dimensions 147 10.10 Differential of a 3D Scalar Field as the First Order Tensor 149 10.11 Scalar Field in n-Dimensional Space 152 10.12 Summary 153 11 Second Order Tensors in 2D 155 11.1 Stress Tensor in 2D 155 11.2 Second Order Tensor in 2D 158 11.3 Physical Meaning of Tensor Matrix in 2D 159 11.4 Changing the Base 161 11.5 Using Two Different Bases in 2D 163 11.6 Some Special Cases of Stress Tensor Matrices in 2D 167 11.7 The First Piola-Kirchhoff Stress Tensor Matrix 168 11.8 The Second Piola-Kirchhoff Stress Tensor Matrix 169 11.9 Summary 174 12 Second Order Tensors in 3D 175 12.1 Stress Tensor in 3D 175 12.2 General Base for Surfaces 179 12.3 General Base for Forces 182 12.4 General Base for Forces and Surfaces 184 12.5 The Cauchy Stress Tensor Matrix in 3D 186 12.6 The First Piola-Kirchhoff Stress Tensor Matrix in 3D 186 12.7 The Second Piola-Kirchhoff Stress Tensor Matrix in 3D 188 12.8 Summary 189 13 Second Order Tensors in nD 191 13.1 Second Order Tensor in n-Dimensions 191 13.2 Summary 200 PART THREE DEFORMABILITY AND MATERIAL MODELING 201 14 Kinematics of Deformation in 1D 203 14.1 Geometric Nonlinearity in General 203 14.2 Stretch 205 14.3 Material Element and Continuum Assumption 208 14.4 Strain 209 14.5 Stress 213 14.6 Summary 214 15 Kinematics of Deformation in 2D 217 15.1 Isotropic Solids 217 15.2 Homogeneous Solids 217 15.3 Homogeneous and Isotropic Solids 217 15.4 Nonhomogeneous and Anisotropic Solids 218 15.5 Material Element Deformation 221 15.6 Cauchy Stress Matrix for the Solid Element 225 15.7 Coordinate Systems in 2D 227 15.8 The Solid- and the Material-Embedded Vector Bases 228 15.9 Kinematics of 2D Deformation 229 15.10 2D Equilibrium Using the Virtual Work of Internal Forces 231 15.11 Examples 235 15.12 Summary 238 16 Kinematics of Deformation in 3D 241 16.1 The Cartesian Coordinate System in 3D 241 16.2 The Solid-Embedded Coordinate System 241 16.3 The Global and the Solid-Embedded Vector Bases 243 16.4 Deformation of the Solid 244 16.5 Generalized Material Element 246 16.6 Kinematic of Deformation in 3D 247 16.7 The Virtual Work of Internal Forces 249 16.8 Summary 255 17 The Unified Constitutive Approach in 2D 257 17.1 Introduction 257 17.2 Material Axes 259 17.3 Micromechanical Aspects and Homogenization 260 17.4 Generalized Homogenization 263 17.5 The Material Package 264 17.6 Hyper-Elastic Constitutive Law 265 17.7 Hypo-Elastic Constitutive Law 266 17.8 A Unified Framework for Developing Anisotropic Material Models in 2D 267 17.9 Generalized Hyper-Elastic Material 267 17.10 Converting the Munjiza Stress Matrix to the Cauchy Stress Matrix 274 17.11 Developing Constitutive Laws 279 17.12 Generalized Hypo-Elastic Material 288 17.13 Unified Constitutive Approach for Strain Rate and Viscosity 292 17.14 Summary 293 18 The Unified Constitutive Approach in 3D 295 18.1 Material Package Framework 295 18.2 Generalized Hyper-Elastic Material 295 18.3 Generalized Hypo-Elastic Material 299 18.4 Developing Material Models 302 18.5 Calculation of the Cauchy Stress Tensor Matrix 302 18.6 Summary 312 PART FOUR THE FINITE ELEMENT METHOD IN 2D 315 19 2D Finite Element: Deformation Kinematics Using the Homogeneous Deformation Triangle 317 19.1 The Finite Element Mesh 317 19.2 The Homogeneous Deformation Finite Element 317 19.3 Summary 326 20 2D Finite Element: Deformation Kinematics Using Iso-Parametric Finite Elements 327 20.1 The Finite Element Library 327 20.2 The Shape Functions 327 20.3 Nodal Positions 330 20.4 Positions of Material Points inside a Single Finite Element 331 20.5 The Solid-Embedded Vector Base 332 20.6 The Material-Embedded Vector Base 334 20.7 Some Examples of 2D Finite Elements 337 20.8 Summary 340 21 Integration of Nodal Forces over Volume of 2D Finite Elements 343 21.1 The Principle of Virtual Work in the 2D Finite Element Method 343 21.2 Nodal Forces for the Homogeneous Deformation Triangle 348 21.3 Nodal Forces for the Six-Noded Triangle 352 21.4 Nodal Forces for the Four-Noded Quadrilateral 353 21.5 Summary 355 22 Reduced and Selective Integration of Nodal Forces over Volume of 2D Finite Elements 357 22.1 Volumetric Locking 357 22.2 Reduced Integration 358 22.3 Selective Integration 359 22.4 Shear Locking 362 22.5 Summary 364 PART FIVE THE FINITE ELEMENT METHOD IN 3D 365 23 3D Deformation Kinematics Using the Homogeneous Deformation Tetrahedron Finite Element 367 23.1 Introduction 367 23.2 The Homogeneous Deformation Four-Noded Tetrahedron Finite Element 368 23.3 Summary 377 24 3D Deformation Kinematics Using Iso-Parametric Finite Elements 379 24.1 The Finite Element Library 379 24.2 The Shape Functions 379 24.3 Nodal Positions 381 24.4 Positions of Material Points inside a Single Finite Element 382 24.5 The Solid-Embedded Infinitesimal Vector Base 383 24.6 The Material-Embedded Infinitesimal Vector Base 386 24.7 Examples of Deformation Kinematics 387 24.8 Summary 392 25 Integration of Nodal Forces over Volume of 3D Finite Elements 393 25.1 Nodal Forces Using Virtual Work 393 25.2 Four-Noded Tetrahedron Finite Element 396 25.3 Reduce Integration for Eight-Noded 3D Solid 399 25.4 Selective Stretch Sampling-Based Integration for the Eight-Noded Solid Finite Element 400 25.5 Summary 401 26 Integration of Nodal Forces over Boundaries of Finite Elements 403 26.1 Stress at Element Boundaries 403 26.2 Integration of the Equivalent Nodal Forces over the Triangle Finite Element 404 26.3 Integration over the Boundary of the Composite Triangle 407 26.4 Integration over the Boundary of the Six-Noded Triangle 408 26.5 Integration of the Equivalent Internal Nodal Forces over the Tetrahedron Boundaries 409 26.6 Summary 412 PART SIX THE FINITE ELEMENT METHOD IN 2.5D 415 27 Deformation in 2.5D Using Membrane Finite Elements 417 27.1 Solids in 2.5D 417 27.2 The Homogeneous Deformation Three-Noded Triangular Membrane Finite Element 419 27.3 Summary 438 28 Deformation in 2.5D Using Shell Finite Elements 439 28.1 Introduction 439 28.2 The Six-Noded Triangular Shell Finite Element 440 28.3 The Solid-Embedded Coordinate System 441 28.4 Nodal Coordinates 442 28.5 The Coordinates of the Finite Element’s Material Points 443 28.6 The Solid-Embedded Infinitesimal Vector Base 444 28.7 The Solid-Embedded Vector Base versus the Material-Embedded Vector Base 447 28.8 The Constitutive Law 449 28.9 Selective Stretch Sampling Based Integration of the Equivalent Nodal Forces 449 28.10 Multi-Layered Shell as an Assembly of Single Layer Shells 455 28.11 Improving the CPU Performance of the Shell Element 456 28.12 Summary 462 Index 463

Read more less

Book SynopsisPractical Multiscaling covers fundamental modelling techniques aimed at bridging diverse temporal and spatial scales ranging from the atomic level to a full-scale product level. It focuses on practical multiscale methods that account for fine-scale (material) details but do not require their precise resolution.Table of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgments xv 1 Introduction to Multiscale Methods 1 1.1 The Rationale for Multiscale Computations 1 1.2 The Hype and the Reality 2 1.3 Examples and Qualification of Multiscale Methods 3 1.4 Nomenclature and definitions 5 1.5 Notation 6 1.5.1 Index and matrix notation 6 1.5.2 M ultiple Spatial Scale Coordinates 8 1.5.3 Domains and boundaries 9 1.5.4 Spatial and Temporal Derivatives 9 1.5.5 Special symbols 10 References 11 2 Upscaling/Downscaling of Continua 13 2.1 Introduction 13 2.2 Homogenizaton of Linear Heterogeneous Media 16 2.2.1 Two-Scale Formulation 16 2.2.2 Two-Scale Formulation – Variational Form 23 2.2.3 Hill–Mandel Macrohomogeneity Condition and Hill–Reuss–Voigt Bounds 25 2.2.4 N umerical Implementation 27 2.2.5 B oundary Layers 38 2.2.6 Convergence Estimates 41 2.3 Upscaling Based on Enhanced Kinematics 47 2.3.1 M ultiscale Finite Element Method 48 2.3.2 Variational Multiscale Method 48 2.3.3 M ultiscale Enrichment Based on Partition of Unity 49 2.4 Homogenization of Nonlinear Heterogeneous Media 50 2.4.1 Asymptotic Expansion for Nonlinear Problems 50 2.4.2 Formulation of the Coarse-Scale Problem 54 2.4.3 Formulation of the Unit Cell Problem 58 2.4.4 Example Problems 61 2.5 Higher Order Homogenization 64 2.5.1 Introduction 64 2.5.2 Formulation 65 2.6 Multiple-Scale Homogenization 69 2.7 Going Beyond Upscaling – Homogenization-Based Multigrid 71 2.7.1 Relaxation 73 2.7.2 Coarse-grid Correction 77 2.7.3 Two-grid Convergence for a Model Problem in a Periodic Heterogeneous Medium 79 2.7.4 Upscaling-Based Prolongation and Restriction Operators 81 2.7.5 Homogenization-based Multigrid and Multigrid Acceleration 83 2.7.6 N onlinear Multigrid 84 2.7.7 M ultigrid for Indefinite Systems 86 Problems 87 References 91 3 Upscaling/Downscaling of Atomistic/Continuum Media 95 3.1 Introduction 95 3.2 Governing Equations 96 3.2.1 M olecular Dynamics Equation of Motion 96 3.2.2 M ultiple Spatial and Temporal Scales and Rescaling of the MD Equations 98 3.3 Generalized Mathematical Homogenization 100 3.3.1 M ultiple-Scale Asymptotic Analysis 100 3.3.2 The Dynamic Atomistic Unit Cell Problem 102 3.3.3 The Coarse-Scale Equations of Motion 103 3.3.4 Continuum Description of Equation of Motion 106 3.3.5 The Thermal Equation 107 3.3.6 Extension to Multi-Body Potentials 112 3.4 Finite Element Implementation and Numerical Verification 113 3.4.1 Weak Forms and Semidiscretization of Coarse-Scale Equations 113 3.4.2 The Fine-Scale (Atomistic) Problem 115 3.5 Statistical Ensemble 118 3.6 Verification 120 3.7 Going Beyond Upscaling 126 3.7.1 Spatial Multilevel Method Versus Space–Time Multilevel Method 127 3.7.2 The WR Scheme 129 3.7.3 Space–Time FAS 130 Problems 131 References 133 4 Reduced Order Homogenization 137 4.1 Introduction 137 4.2 Reduced Order Homogenization for Two-Scale Problems 139 4.2.1 Governing Equations 139 4.2.2 Residual-Free Fields and Model Reduction 141 4.2.3 Reduced Order System of Equations 148 4.2.4 One-Dimensional Model Problem 150 4.2.5 Computational Aspects 154 4.3 Lower Order Approximation of Eigenstrains 156 4.3.1 The Pitfalls of a Piecewise Constant One-Partition-Per-Phase Model 157 4.3.2 Impotent Eigenstrain 159 4.3.3 Hybrid Impotent-Incompatible Eigenstrain Mode Estimators 163 4.3.4 Chaboche Modification 164 4.3.5 Analytical Relations for Various Approximations of Eigenstrain Influence Functions 165 4.3.6 Eigenstrain Upwinding 172 4.3.7 Enhancing Constitutive Laws of Phases 175 4.3.8 Validation of the Hybrid Impotent-Incompatible Reduced Order Model with Eigenstrain Upwinding and Enhanced Constitutive Model of Phases 180 4.4 Extension to Nonlocal Heterogeneous Media 184 4.4.1 Staggered Nonlocal Model for Homogeneous Materials 186 4.4.2 Staggered Nonlocal Multiscale Model 188 4.4.3 Validation of the Nonlocal Model 189 4.4.4 Rescaling Constitutive Equations 193 4.5 Extension to Dispersive Heterogeneous Media 197 4.5.1 Dispersive Coarse-Scale Problem 199 4.5.2 The Quasi-Dynamic Unit Cell Problem 201 4.5.3 Linear Model Problem 204 4.5.4 N onlinear Model Problem 205 4.5.5 Implicit and Explicit Formulations 208 4.6 Extension to Multiple Spatial Scales 209 4.6.1 Residual-Free Governing Equations at Multiple Scales 210 4.6.2 M ultiple-Scale Reduced Order Model 211 4.7 Extension to Large Deformations 214 4.8 Extension to Multiple Temporal Scales with Application to Fatigue 219 4.8.1 Temporal Homogenization 220 4.8.2 M ultiple Temporal and Spatial Scales 224 4.8.3 Fatigue Constitutive Equation 225 4.8.4 Verfication of the Multiscale Fatigue Model 226 4.9 Extension to Multiphysics Problems 227 4.9.1 Reduced Order Coupled Vector-Scalar Field Model at Multiple Scales 228 4.9.2 Environmental Degradation of PMC 232 4.9.3 Validation of the Multiphysics Model 235 4.10 Multiscale Characterization 239 4.10.1 Formulation of the Inverse Problem 239 4.10.2 Characterization of Model Parameters in ROH 241 Problems 241 References 243 5 Scale-separation-free Upscaling/Downscaling of Continua 249 5.1 Introduction 249 5.2 Computational Continua (C2) 251 5.2.1 N onlocal Quadrature 251 5.2.2 Coarse-Scale Problem 254 5.2.3 Computational Unit Cell Problem 257 5.2.4 One-dimensional model problem 260 5.3 Reduced Order Computational Continua (RC2) 265 5.3.1 Residual-Free Computational Unit Cell Problem 266 5.3.2 The Coarse-Scale Weak Form 274 5.3.3 Coarse-Scale Consistent Tangent Stiffness Matrix 275 5.4 Nonlocal Quadrature in Multidimensions 278 5.4.1 Tetrahedral Elements 278 5.4.2 Triangular Elements 287 5.4.3 Quadrilateral and Hexahedral Elements 292 5.5 Model Verification 297 5.5.1 The Beam Problem 300 Problems 302 References 303 6 Multiscale Design Software 305 6.1 Introduction 305 6.2 Microanalysis with MDS-Lite 308 6.2.1 Familiarity with the GUI 309 6.2.2 Labeling Data Files 312 6.2.3 The First Walkthrough MDS-Micro Example 312 6.2.4 The Second Walkthrough MDS-Micro Example 318 6.2.5 Parametric Library of Unit Cell Models 331 6.3 Macroanalysis with MDS-Lite 340 6.3.1 First Walkthrough MDS-Macro Example 341 6.3.2 Second Walkthrough MDS-Macro Example 362 6.3.3 Third Walkthrough Example 373 6.3.4 Fourth Walkthrough Example 379 Problems 391 References 393 Index 395

Read more less

Book SynopsisEconomic growth and rising levels of consumption in developing and developed countries has been observed as being deeply coupled with natural resource usage and material consumption. The increasing need for natural resources has raised concerns regarding issues such as resource scarcity, undesirable environmental impacts due to material extraction, primary production, and suboptimal product disposal, and social or political tensions. Product End-of-Life (EoL) options, such as reusing or recycling, attempt to limit or reduce the amount of waste sent to a landfill, providing strategic means to decouple the link between economic growth and resource usage. These EoL options have the potential to close material loops, further utilizing wastes as resources, reducing environmental impacts, conserving natural resources, reducing material prices, and providing job opportunities in developing countries.Remanufacturing, on the other hand, is a unique EoL option due to increasing thTable of ContentsPreface xi 1 Value-Retention Processes within the Circular Economy 1 Jennifer Russell and Nabil Nasr 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 Overview and Evaluation of Value-Retention Processes 3 1.2.1 Defining Value-Retention Processes 3 1.2.1.1 Arranging Direct Reuse 4 1.2.1.2 Repair 6 1.2.1.3 Refurbishment & Comprehensive Refurbishment 6 1.2.1.4 Remanufacturing 8 1.2.2 Expanded Systems-Perspective for VRPs 9 1.2.3 Evaluating the Value-Retention Potential of VRPs 10 1.3 Value-Retention Process Evaluation Results 13 1.3.1 Environmental Impacts of Value-Retention Processes at the Product-Level 13 1.3.2 Economic Advantages of Value-Retention Processes at the Product-Level 15 1.3.2.1 Production Waste Reduction through Value-Retention Processes 17 1.3.2.2 Production Cost Advantages of Value-Retention Processes 17 1.3.2.3 Employment Opportunities through Value-Retention Processes 17 1.3.3 Systemic Barriers to VRPs 18 1.4 Key Insights Regarding VRPs 19 1.4.1 Value-Retention Processes Create Net-Positive Outcomes for Circular Economy 19 1.4.2 Product-Level Efficiency Gains Lead to Economy-Level Efficiency Gains 20 1.4.3 The Mechanics of a System Designed for Value-Retention Processes 21 1.4.3.1 Value-Retention Processes are a Gateway to Recycling 22 1.4.4 Overcoming Barriers to Value-Retention Processes 23 1.4.4.1 Economic Conditions and Access to VRP Products 23 1.4.4.2 Market Challenges 23 1.4.4.3 Regulatory and Policy Opportunities 24 1.4.4.4 Diversion & Collection Infrastructure 24 1.4.4.5 The Nature of Barriers Must Guide Strategic Barrier Alleviation 25 1.5 Conclusions 25 References 28 2 The Role of Remanufacturing in a Circular Economy 31 Erik Sundin 2.1 Introduction 31 2.2 Circular Economy 32 2.2.1 What is It? 32 2.2.2 How Does It Work? 35 2.2.3 Summary 40 2.3 Remanufacturing 40 2.3.1 What is Remanufacturing? 40 2.3.2 Who Remanufactures? 43 2.3.3 Why Remanufacture? 46 2.3.4 Why Not Remanufacture? 49 2.3.5 Why Buy Remanufactured Products? 51 2.3.6 Why is Remanufacturing Good for the Environment? 52 2.4 Statements from Industry and Conclusions 56 2.4.1 Statements from Industry 56 2.4.2 Remanufacturing as the Heart and Lungs of the Circular Economy 57 References 59 Further Reading 60 3 Remanufacturing Business Models 61 Gilvan C. Souza 3.1 Introduction 62 3.2 Should an OEM Remanufacture? 63 3.2.1 A Model to Answer the Question 66 3.2.2 3PR Competition 73 3.2.3 Other Strategic Considerations 74 3.3 A Key Tactical Decision: Core Acquisition 77 3.4 Conclusion 81 References 83 4 Remanufacturing, Closed-Loop Systems and Reverse Logistics 85 Rolf Steinhilper and Steffen Butzer 4.1 Introduction 85 4.2 Remanufacturing in Closed-Loop Systems 86 4.2.1 Closed-Loop Supply Chains and Systems 87 4.2.2 Differentiation of Regeneration Approaches 88 4.2.3 The Role of Cores for Remanufacturing 90 4.3 Reverse Logistics 94 4.3.1 Justifications for Reverse Logistics and Remanufacturing 95 4.3.2 Core Return Strategies 97 4.3.3 Barriers of Reverse Logistics and Remanufacturing 100 4.3.4 Drivers of Reverse Logistics and Remanufacturing 102 4.3.5 In- or Outsourced Reverse Logistics 103 4.4 The Future of Reverse Logistics and Remanufacturing 106 References 107 5 Product Service and Remanufacturing 111 Mitsutaka Matsumoto 5.1 Introduction 112 5.2 Barriers to Remanufacturing 114 5.3 Product Services 116 5.4 Product Service as an Enabler of Remanufacturing 118 5.5 Industrial Practices 121 5.5.1 Heavy-Duty and Off-Road Equipment (HDOR) 121 5.5.2 Photocopiers 125 5.5.3 Summary and Implications 130 5.6 Conclusion and Challenge 132 References 134 6 Design for Remanufacturing 137 Brian Hilton and Michael Thurston 6.1 Introduction 138 6.2 Defining the Barriers to Remanufacturing Growth 141 6.3 Remanufacturing Design Enablers 142 6.4 Three Principles of Designing for Remanufacturing 143 6.4.1 Design to Create Value 144 6.4.1.1 Designing for Product Quality 145 6.4.1.2 Integrate Value 147 6.4.2 Design to Preserve Value 148 6.4.2.1 Designing for Durability 148 6.4.2.2 Designing for Viability 150 6.4.2.3 Design for Proactive Damage Prevention through Product Monitoring 153 6.4.3 Design to Recover Value 154 6.4.3.1 Designing for Assessability 154 6.4.3.2 Designing for Separability/ Disassembly (DfD) 156 6.4.3.3 Designing for Restorability 159 6.5 Conclusion 162 6.6 Acknowledgements 163 References 164 General References 167 7 Global Challenges and Market Transformation in Support of Remanufacturing 169 Shanshan Yang 7.1 Introduction 170 7.2 Global Remanufacturing Landscapes 172 7.2.1 The United States 172 7.2.2 Europe 172 7.2.3 China 175 7.2.4 Other Countries 176 7.3 Overview of Remanufacturing Sectors 176 7.3.1 Aerospace 179 7.3.2 Automotive Parts 180 7.3.3 Heavy-Duty and Off-Road (HDOR) 181 7.3.4 Information Technology (IT) 182 7.3.5 Other Sectors 184 7.4 Global Challenges 185 7.4.1 Standards & Legislation 185 7.4.2 Design 187 7.4.3 Market Demand 188 7.4.4 Core Supply 188 7.4.5 Skills, Technology, and Data of Remanufacturing 189 7.5 Paving the Way for Uptake of Remanufacturing 190 7.5.1 Connecting with New Business Models—The Product Service System 191 7.5.2 Setting Up Global Reverse Supply Chain 197 7.5.3 Innovative and Enabling Technology from Industry 4.0 200 7.5.4 Design for Remanufacturing 204 7.6 Conclusion 206 References 207 Index 211

Read more less

Book SynopsisA theoretical and technical guide to the electric vehicle lithium-ion battery management system Covers the timely topic of battery management systems for lithium batteries. After introducing the problem and basic background theory, it discusses battery modeling and state estimation.Table of ContentsAbout the Authors xi Foreword xiii Preface xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 The Development of Batteries in Electric Drive Vehicles 1 1.1.1 The Goals 1 1.1.2 Trends in Development of the Batteries 1 1.1.3 Application Issues of LIBs 3 1.1.4 Significance of Battery Management Technology 4 1.2 Development of Battery Management Technologies 5 1.2.1 No Management 5 1.2.2 Simple Management 5 1.2.3 Comprehensive Management 6 1.3 BMS Key Technologies 7 References 8 2 Performance Modeling of Lithium-ion Batteries 9 2.1 Reaction Mechanism of Lithium-ion Batteries 9 2.2 Testing the Characteristics of Lithium-ion Batteries 11 2.2.1 Rate Discharge Characteristics 11 2.2.2 Charge and Discharge Characteristics Under Operating Conditions 12 2.2.3 Impact of Temperature on Capacity 15 2.2.4 Self-Discharge 19 2.3 Battery Modeling Method 20 2.3.1 Equivalent Circuit Model 21 2.3.2 Electrochemical Model 22 2.3.3 Neural Network Model 24 2.4 Simulation and Comparison of Equivalent Circuit Models 24 2.4.1 Model Parameters Identification Principle 25 2.4.2 Implementation Steps of Parameter Identification 25 2.4.3 Comparison of Simulation of Three Equivalent Circuit Models 28 2.5 Battery Modeling Method Based on a Battery Discharging Curve 31 2.6 Battery Pack Modeling 34 2.6.1 Battery Pack Modeling 35 2.6.2 Simulation of Battery Pack Model 35 References 42 3 Battery State Estimation 43 3.1 Definition of SOC 43 3.1.1 The Maximum Available Capacity 43 3.1.2 Definition of Single Cell SOC 46 3.1.3 Definition of the SOC of Series Batteries 48 3.2 Discussion on the Estimation of the SOC of a Battery 50 3.2.1 Load Voltage Detection 50 3.2.2 Electromotive Force Method 50 3.2.3 Resistance Method 52 3.2.4 Ampere-hour Counting Method 53 3.2.5 Kalman Filter Method 54 3.2.6 Neural Network Method 55 3.2.7 Adaptive Neuro-Fuzzy Inference System 57 3.2.8 Support Vector Machines 60 3.3 Battery SOC Estimation Algorithm Application 62 3.3.1 The SOC Estimation of a PEV Power Battery 62 3.3.2 Power Battery SOC Estimation for Hybrid Vehicles 80 3.4 Definition and Estimation of the Battery SOE 87 3.4.1 Definition of the Single Battery SOE 87 3.4.2 SOE Definition of the Battery Groups 91 3.5 Method for Estimation of the Battery Group SOE and the Remaining Energy 95 3.6 Method of Estimation of the Actual Available Energy of the Battery 96 References 98 4 The Prediction of Battery Pack Peak Power 101 4.1 Definition of Peak Power 101 4.1.1 Peak Power Capability of Batteries 101 4.1.2 Battery Power Density 102 4.1.3 State of Function of Batteries 103 4.2 Methods for Testing Peak Power 103 4.2.1 Test Methods Developed by Americans 103 4.2.2 The Test Method of Japan 106 4.2.3 The Chinese Standard Test Method 108 4.2.4 The Constant Power Test Method 109 4.2.5 Comparison of the Above-Mentioned Testing Methods 112 4.3 Peak Power 112 4.3.1 The Relation between Peak Power and Temperature 113 4.3.2 The Relation between Peak Power and SOC 115 4.3.3 Relationship between Peak Power and Ohmic Internal Resistance 116 4.4 Available Power of the Battery Pack 117 4.4.1 Factors Influencing Available Power 117 4.4.2 The Optimized Method of Available Power 119 References 121 5 Charging Control Technologies for Lithium-ion Batteries 123 5.1 Literature Review on Lithium-ion Battery Charging Technologies 123 5.1.1 The Academic Significance of Charging Technologies of Lithium-ion Batteries 123 5.1.2 Development of Charging Technologies for Lithium-ion Batteries 124 5.2 Key Indicators for Measuring Charging Characteristics 129 5.2.1 Charge Capacity 130 5.2.2 Charging Efficiency 135 5.2.3 Charging Time 141 5.3 Charging External Characteristic Parameters of the Lithium-ion Battery 146 5.3.1 Current 146 5.3.2 Voltage 146 5.3.3 Temperature 147 5.4 Analysis of Charging Polarization Voltage Characteristics 147 5.4.1 Calculation of the Polarization Voltage 147 5.4.2 Analysis of Charging Polarization in the Time Domain 150 5.4.3 Characteristic Analysis of the Charging Polarization in the SOC Domain 156 5.4.4 The Impact of Different SOCs and DODs on the Battery Polarization 160 5.5 Improvement of the Constant Current and Constant Voltage Charging Method 163 5.5.1 Selection of the Key Process Parameters in the CCCV Charging Process 164 5.5.2 Optimization Strategy for the CCCV Charging 165 5.6 Principles and Methods of the Polarization Voltage Control Charging Method 167 5.6.1 Principles 167 5.6.2 Implementation Methods 169 5.6.3 Comparison of the Constant Polarization Charging Method and the Traditional Charging Method 172 5.7 Summary 177 References 177 6 Evaluation and Equalization of Battery Consistency 179 6.1 Analysis of Battery Consistency 179 6.1.1 Causes of Batteries Inconsistency 180 6.1.2 The Influence of Inconsistency on the Performance of the Battery Pack 182 6.2 Evaluation Indexes of Battery Consistency 183 6.2.1 The Natural Parameters Influencing Parallel Connected Battery Characteristics 183 6.2.2 Parameters Influencing the Battery External Voltage 191 6.2.3 Method for Analysis of Battery Consistency 197 6.3 Quantitative Evaluation of Battery Consistency 201 6.3.1 Quantitative Evaluation of Consistency Based on the External Voltage 202 6.3.2 Quantitative Evaluation of Consistency Based on the Capacity Utilization Rate of the Battery Pack 203 6.3.3 Quantitative Evaluation of Consistency Based on the Energy Utilization Rate of the Battery Pack 206 6.4 Equalization of the Battery Pack 209 6.4.1 Equalization Based on the External Voltage of a Single Cell 209 6.4.2 Equalization of the Battery Pack Based on the Maximum Available Capacity 211 6.4.3 Equalization of the Battery Pack Based on the Maximum Available Energy 215 6.4.4 Equalization Based on the SOC of the Single Cells 217 6.4.5 Control Strategy for the Equalizer 219 6.4.6 Effect Confirmation 221 6.5 Summary 223 References 224 7 Technologies for the Design and Application of the Battery Management System 225 7.1 The Functions and Architectures of a Battery Management System 225 7.1.1 The Functions of the Battery Management System 225 7.1.2 Architecture of the Battery Management System 227 7.2 Design of the Battery Parameters Measurement Module 230 7.2.1 Battery Cell Voltage Measurement 230 7.2.2 Temperature Measurement 235 7.2.3 Current Measurement 238 7.2.4 Total Voltage Measurement 241 7.2.5 Insulation Measurement 242 7.3 Design of the Battery Equalization Management Circuit 246 7.3.1 The Energy Non-Dissipative Type 247 7.3.2 The Energy Dissipative Type 250 7.4 Data Communication 251 7.4.1 CAN Communication 251 7.4.2 A New Communication Mode 254 7.5 The Logic and Safety Control 255 7.5.1 The Power-Up Control 255 7.5.2 Charge Control 256 7.5.3 Temperature Control 258 7.5.4 Fault Alarm and Control 259 7.6 Testing the Stability of the BMS 260 7.6.1 Dielectric Resistance 260 7.6.2 Insulation Withstand Voltage Performance 262 7.6.3 Test on Monitoring Functions of BMS 262 7.6.4 SOC Estimation 263 7.6.5 Battery Fault Diagnosis 263 7.6.6 Security and Protection 263 7.6.7 Operating at High Temperatures 263 7.6.8 Operating at Low Temperatures 263 7.6.9 High-Temperature Resistance 264 7.6.10 Low-Temperature Resistance 264 7.6.11 Salt Spray Resistance 264 7.6.12 Wet-Hot Resistance 264 7.6.13 Vibration Resistance 264 7.6.14 Resistance to Power Polarity Reverse Connection Performance 265 7.6.15 Electromagnetic Radiation Immunity 265 7.7 Practical Examples of BMS 265 7.7.1 Pure Electric Bus (Pure Electric Bus for the Beijing Olympic Games) 265 7.7.2 Pure Electric Vehicles (JAC Tongyue) 269 7.7.3 Hybrid Electric Bus (FOTON Plug-In Range Extended Electric bus) 269 7.7.4 Hybrid Passenger Car Vehicle (Trumpchi) 271 7.7.5 The Trolley Bus with Two Kinds of Power 273 Index 275

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe second edition of a modern introduction to the chemistry and physics of solids. This textbook takes a unique integrated approach designed to appeal to both science and engineering students. Review of 1st edition an extremely wide-ranging, useful book that is accessible to anyone with a firm grasp of high school sciencethis is an outstanding and affordable resource for the lifelong learner or current student. Choice, 2005 The book provides an introduction to the chemistry and physics of solids that acts as a foundation to courses in materials science, engineering, chemistry, and physics. It is equally accessible to both engineers and scientists, through its more scientific approach, whilst still covering the material essential to engineers. This edition contains new sections on the use of computing methods to solve materials problems and has been thoroughly updated to include the many developments and advances made in thTrade Review“Summing Up: Recommended. Lower-division undergraduates and two-year technical program students.” (Choice, 1 February 2014)Table of ContentsPreface to the Second Edition xvii Preface to the First Edition xix PART 1 STRUCTURES AND MICROSTRUCTURES 1 1 The electron structure of atoms 3 1.1 The hydrogen atom 3 1.1.1 The quantum mechanical description 3 1.1.2 The energy of the electron 4 1.1.3 Electron orbitals 5 1.1.4 Orbital shapes 5 1.2 Many-electron atoms 7 1.2.1 The orbital approximation 7 1.2.2 Electron spin and electron configuration 7 1.2.3 The periodic table 9 1.3 Atomic energy levels 11 1.3.1 Spectra and energy levels 11 1.3.2 Terms and term symbols 11 1.3.3 Levels 13 1.3.4 Electronic energy level calculations 14 Further reading 15 Problems and exercises 16 2 Chemical bonding 19 2.1 Ionic bonding 19 2.1.1 Ions 19 2.1.2 Ionic size and shape 20 2.1.3 Lattice energies 21 2.1.4 Atomistic simulation 23 2.2 Covalent bonding 24 2.2.1 Valence bond theory 24 2.2.2 Molecular orbital theory 30 2.3 Metallic bonding and energy bands 35 2.3.1 Molecular orbitals and energy bands 36 2.3.2 The free electron gas 37 2.3.3 Energy bands 40 2.3.4 Properties of metals 41 2.3.5 Bands in ionic and covalent solids 43 2.3.6 Computation of properties 44 Further reading 45 Problems and exercises 46 3 States of aggregation 49 3.1 Weak chemical bonds 49 3.2 Macrostructures, microstructures and nanostructures 52 3.2.1 Structures and scale 52 3.2.2 Crystalline solids 52 3.2.3 Quasicrystals 53 3.2.4 Non-crystalline solids 54 3.2.5 Partly crystalline solids 55 3.2.6 Nanoparticles and nanostructures 55 3.3 The development of microstructures 57 3.3.1 Solidification 58 3.3.2 Processing 58 3.4 Point defects 60 3.4.1 Point defects in crystals of elements 60 3.4.2 Solid solutions 61 3.4.3 Schottky defects 62 3.4.4 Frenkel defects 63 3.4.5 Non-stoichiometric compounds 64 3.4.6 Point defect notation 66 3.5 Linear, planar and volume defects 68 3.5.1 Edge dislocations 68 3.5.2 Screw dislocations 69 3.5.3 Partial and mixed dislocations 69 3.5.4 Planar defects 69 3.5.5 Volume defects: precipitates 70 Further reading 73 Problems and exercises 73 4 Phase diagrams 77 4.1 Phases and phase diagrams 77 4.1.1 One-component (unary) systems 77 4.1.2 The phase rule for one-component (unary) systems 79 4.2 Binary phase diagrams 80 4.2.1 Two-component (binary) systems 80 4.2.2 The phase rule for two-component (binary) systems 81 4.2.3 Simple binary diagrams: nickel–copper as an example 81 4.2.4 Binary systems containing a eutectic point: tin–lead as an example 83 4.2.5 Intermediate phases and melting 87 4.3 The iron–carbon system near to iron 88 4.3.1 The iron–carbon phase diagram 88 4.3.2 Steels and cast irons 89 4.3.3 Invariant points 89 4.4 Ternary systems 90 4.5 Calculation of phase diagrams: CALPHAD 93 Further reading 94 Problems and exercises 94 5 Crystallography and crystal structures 101 5.1 Crystallography 101 5.1.1 Crystal lattices 101 5.1.2 Crystal systems and crystal structures 102 5.1.3 Symmetry and crystal classes 104 5.1.4 Crystal planes and Miller indices 106 5.1.5 Hexagonal crystals and Miller-Bravais indices 109 5.1.6 Directions 110 5.1.7 Crystal geometry and the reciprocal lattice 112 5.2 The determination of crystal structures 114 5.2.1 Single crystal X-ray diffraction 114 5.2.2 Powder X-ray diffraction and crystal identification 115 5.2.3 Neutron diffraction 118 5.2.4 Electron diffraction 118 5.3 Crystal structures 118 5.3.1 Unit cells, atomic coordinates and nomenclature 118 5.3.2 The density of a crystal 119 5.3.3 The cubic close-packed (A1) structure 121 5.3.4 The body-centred cubic (A2) structure 121 5.3.5 The hexagonal (A3) structure 122 5.3.6 The diamond (A4) structure 122 5.3.7 The graphite (A9) structure 123 5.3.8 The halite (rock salt, sodium chloride, B1) structure 123 5.3.9 The spinel (H11) structure 125 5.4 Structural relationships 126 5.4.1 Sphere packing 126 5.4.2 Ionic structures in terms of anion packing 128 5.4.3 Polyhedral representations 129 Further reading 131 Problems and exercises 131 PART 2 CLASSES OF MATERIALS 137 6 Metals, ceramics, polymers and composites 139 6.1 Metals 139 6.1.1 The crystal structures of pure metals 140 6.1.2 Metallic radii 141 6.1.3 Alloy solid solutions 142 6.1.4 Metallic glasses 145 6.1.5 The principal properties of metals 146 6.2 Ceramics 147 6.2.1 Bonding and structure of silicate ceramics 147 6.2.2 Some non-silicate ceramics 149 6.2.3 The preparation and processing of ceramics 152 6.2.4 The principal properties of ceramics 154 6.3 Silicate glasses 154 6.3.1 Bonding and structure of silicate glasses 155 6.3.2 Glass deformation 157 6.3.3 Strengthened glass 159 6.3.4 Glass-ceramics 160 6.4 Polymers 161 6.4.1 Polymer formation 162 6.4.2 Microstructures of polymers 165 6.4.3 Production of polymers 170 6.4.4 Elastomers 173 6.4.5 The principal properties of polymers 175 6.5 Composite materials 177 6.5.1 Fibre-reinforced plastics 177 6.5.2 Metal-matrix composites 177 6.5.3 Ceramic-matrix composites 178 6.5.4 Cement and concrete 178 Further reading 181 Problems and exercises 182 PART 3 REACTIONS AND TRANSFORMATIONS 189 7 Diffusion and ionic conductivity 191 7.1 Self-diffusion, tracer diffusion and tracer impurity diffusion 191 7.2 Non-steady-state diffusion 194 7.3 Steady-state diffusion 195 7.4 Temperature variation of diffusion coefficient 195 7.5 The effect of impurities 196 7.6 Random walk diffusion 197 7.7 Diffusion in solids 198 7.8 Self-diffusion in one dimension 199 7.9 Self-diffusion in crystals 201 7.10 The Arrhenius equation and point defects 202 7.11 Correlation factors for self-diffusion 204 7.12 Ionic conductivity 205 7.12.1 Ionic conductivity in solids 205 7.12.2 The relationship between ionic conductivity and diffusion coefficient 208 Further reading 209 Problems and exercises 209 8 Phase transformations and reactions 213 8.1 Sintering 213 8.1.1 Sintering and reaction 213 8.1.2 The driving force for sintering 215 8.1.3 The kinetics of neck growth 216 8.2 First-order and second-order phase transitions 216 8.2.1 First-order phase transitions 217 8.2.2 Second-order transitions 217 8.3 Displacive and reconstructive transitions 218 8.3.1 Displacive transitions 218 8.3.2 Reconstructive transitions 219 8.4 Order–disorder transitions 221 8.4.1 Positional ordering 221 8.4.2 Orientational ordering 222 8.5 Martensitic transformations 223 8.5.1 The austenite–martensite transition 223 8.5.2 Martensitic transformations in zirconia 226 8.5.3 Martensitic transitions in Ni–Ti alloys 227 8.5.4 Shape-memory alloys 228 8.6 Phase diagrams and microstructures 230 8.6.1 Equilibrium solidification of simple binary alloys 230 8.6.2 Non-equilibrium solidification and coring 230 8.6.3 Solidification in systems containing a eutectic point 231 8.6.4 Equilibrium heat treatment of steel in the Fe–C phase diagram 233 8.7 High-temperature oxidation of metals 236 8.7.1 Direct corrosion 236 8.7.2 The rate of oxidation 236 8.7.3 Oxide film microstructure 237 8.7.4 Film growth via diffusion 238 8.7.5 Alloys 239 8.8 Solid-state reactions 240 8.8.1 Spinel formation 240 8.8.2 The kinetics of spinel formation 241 Further reading 242 Problems and exercises 242 9 Oxidation and reduction 247 9.1 Galvanic cells 247 9.1.1 Cell basics 247 9.1.2 Standard electrode potentials 249 9.1.3 Cell potential and Gibbs energy 250 9.1.4 Concentration dependence 251 9.2 Chemical analysis using galvanic cells 251 9.2.1 pH meters 251 9.2.2 Ion selective electrodes 253 9.2.3 Oxygen sensors 254 9.3 Batteries 255 9.3.1 ‘Dry’ and alkaline primary batteries 255 9.3.2 Lithium-ion primary batteries 256 9.3.3 The lead–acid secondary battery 257 9.3.4 Lithium-ion secondary batteries 257 9.3.5 Lithium–air batteries 259 9.3.6 Fuel cells 260 9.4 Corrosion 262 9.4.1 The reaction of metals with water and aqueous acids 262 9.4.2 Dissimilar metal corrosion 264 9.4.3 Single metal electrochemical corrosion 265 9.5 Electrolysis 266 9.5.1 Electrolytic cells 267 9.5.2 Electroplating 267 9.5.3 The amount of product produced during electrolysis 268 9.5.4 The electrolytic preparation of titanium by the FFC Cambridge Process 269 9.6 Pourbaix diagrams 270 9.6.1 Passivation, corrosion and leaching 270 9.6.2 The stability field of water 270 9.6.3 Pourbaix diagram for a metal showing two valence states, M2þ and M3þ 271 9.6.4 Pourbaix diagram displaying tendency for corrosion 273 Further reading 274 Problems and exercises 275 PART 4 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES 279 10 Mechanical properties of solids 281 10.1 Strength and hardness 281 10.1.1 Strength 281 10.1.2 Stress and strain 282 10.1.3 Stress–strain curves 283 10.1.4 Toughness and stiffness 286 10.1.5 Superelasticity 286 10.1.6 Hardness 287 10.2 Elastic moduli 289 10.2.1 Young’s modulus (the modulus of elasticity) (E or Y) 289 10.2.2 Poisson’s ratio (n) 291 10.2.3 The longitudinal or axial modulus (L or M) 292 10.2.4 The shear modulus or modulus of rigidity (G or m) 292 10.2.5 The bulk modulus, K or B 293 10.2.6 The Lame modulus (l) 293 10.2.7 Relationships between the elastic moduli 293 10.2.8 Ultrasonic waves in elastic solids 293 10.3 Deformation and fracture 295 10.3.1 Brittle fracture 295 10.3.2 Plastic deformation of metals 298 10.3.3 Dislocation movement and plastic deformation 298 10.3.4 Brittle and ductile materials 301 10.3.5 Plastic deformation of polymers 302 10.3.6 Fracture following plastic deformation 302 10.3.7 Strengthening 304 10.3.8 Computation of deformation and fracture 306 10.4 Time-dependent properties 307 10.4.1 Fatigue 307 10.4.2 Creep 308 10.5 Nanoscale properties 312 10.5.1 Solid lubricants 312 10.5.2 Auxetic materials 313 10.5.3 Thin films and nanowires 315 10.6 Composite materials 317 10.6.1 Young’s modulus of large particle composites 317 10.6.2 Young’s modulus of fibre-reinforced composites 318 10.6.3 Young’s modulus of a two-phase system 319 Further reading 320 Problems and exercises 321 11 Insulating solids 327 11.1 Dielectrics 327 11.1.1 Relative permittivity and polarisation 327 11.1.2 Polarisability 329 11.1.3 Polarisability and relative permittivity 330 11.1.4 The frequency dependence of polarisability and relative permittivity 331 11.1.5 The relative permittivity of crystals 332 11.2 Piezoelectrics, pyroelectrics and ferroelectrics 333 11.2.1 The piezoelectric and pyroelectric effects 333 11.2.2 Crystal symmetry and the piezoelectric and pyroelectric effects 335 11.2.3 Piezoelectric mechanisms 336 11.2.4 Quartz oscillators 337 11.2.5 Piezoelectric polymers 338 11.3 Ferroelectrics 340 11.3.1 Ferroelectric crystals 340 11.3.2 Hysteresis and domain growth in ferroelectric crystals 341 11.3.3 Antiferroelectrics 344 11.3.4 The temperature dependence of ferroelectricity and antiferroelectricity 344 11.3.5 Ferroelectricity due to hydrogen bonds 345 11.3.6 Ferroelectricity due to polar groups 347 11.3.7 Ferroelectricity due to medium-sized transition-metal cations 348 11.3.8 Poling and polycrystalline ferroelectric solids 349 11.3.9 Doping and modification of properties 349 11.3.10 Relaxor ferroelectrics 351 11.3.11 Ferroelectric nanoparticles, thin films and superlattices 352 11.3.12 Flexoelectricity in ferroelectrics 353 Further reading 354 Problems and exercises 355 12 Magnetic solids 361 12.1 Magnetic materials 361 12.1.1 Characterisation of magnetic materials 361 12.1.2 Magnetic dipoles and magnetic flux 362 12.1.3 Atomic magnetism 363 12.1.4 Overview of magnetic materials 365 12.2 Paramagnetic materials 368 12.2.1 The magnetic moment of paramagnetic atoms and ions 368 12.2.2 High and low spin: crystal field effects 369 12.2.3 Temperature dependence of paramagnetic susceptibility 371 12.2.4 Pauli paramagnetism 373 12.3 Ferromagnetic materials 374 12.3.1 Ferromagnetism 374 12.3.2 Exchange energy 376 12.3.3 Domains 378 12.3.4 Hysteresis 380 12.3.5 Hard and soft magnetic materials 380 12.4 Antiferromagnetic materials and superexchange 381 12.5 Ferrimagnetic materials 382 12.5.1 Cubic spinel ferrites 382 12.5.2 Garnet structure ferrites 383 12.5.3 Hexagonal ferrites 383 12.5.4 Double exchange 384 12.6 Nanostructures 385 12.6.1 Small particles and data recording 385 12.6.2 Superparamagnetism and thin films 386 12.6.3 Superlattices 386 12.6.4 Photoinduced magnetism 387 12.7 Magnetic defects 389 12.7.1 Magnetic defects in semiconductors 389 12.7.2 Charge and spin states in cobaltites and manganites 390 Further reading 393 Problems and exercises 393 13 Electronic conductivity in solids 399 13.1 Metals 399 13.1.1 Metals, semiconductors and insulators 399 13.1.2 Electron drift in an electric field 401 13.1.3 Electronic conductivity 402 13.1.4 Resistivity 404 13.2 Semiconductors 405 13.2.1 Intrinsic semiconductors 405 13.2.2 Band gap measurement 407 13.2.3 Extrinsic semiconductors 408 13.2.4 Carrier concentrations in extrinsic semiconductors 409 13.2.5 Characterisation 411 13.2.6 The p-n junction diode 413 13.3 Metal–insulator transitions 416 13.3.1 Metals and insulators 416 13.3.2 Electron–electron repulsion 417 13.3.3 Modification of insulators 418 13.3.4 Transparent conducting oxides 419 13.4 Conducting polymers 420 13.5 Nanostructures and quantum confinement of electrons 423 13.5.1 Quantum wells 424 13.5.2 Quantum wires and quantum dots 425 13.6 Superconductivity 426 13.6.1 Superconductors 426 13.6.2 The effect of magnetic fields 427 13.6.3 The effect of current 428 13.6.4 The nature of superconductivity 428 13.6.5 Josephson junctions 430 13.6.6 Cuprate high-temperature superconductors 430 Further reading 438 Problems and exercises 438 14 Optical aspects of solids 445 14.1 Light 445 14.1.1 Light waves 445 14.1.2 Photons 447 14.2 Sources of light 449 14.2.1 Incandescence 449 14.2.2 Luminescence and phosphors 450 14.2.3 Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 453 14.2.4 Solid-state lasers 454 14.3 Colour and appearance 460 14.3.1 Luminous solids 460 14.3.2 Non-luminous solids 460 14.3.3 Attenuation 461 14.4 Refraction and dispersion 462 14.4.1 Refraction 462 14.4.2 Refractive index and structure 464 14.4.3 The refractive index of metals and semiconductors 465 14.4.4 Dispersion 465 14.5 Reflection 466 14.5.1 Reflection from a surface 466 14.5.2 Reflection from a single thin film 467 14.5.3 The reflectivity of a single thin film in air 469 14.5.4 The colour of a single thin film in air 469 14.5.5 The colour of a single thin film on a substrate 470 14.5.6 Low-reflectivity (antireflection) and high-reflectivity coatings 471 14.5.7 Multiple thin films and dielectric mirrors 471 14.6 Scattering 472 14.6.1 Rayleigh scattering 472 14.6.2 Mie scattering 475 14.7 Diffraction 475 14.7.1 Diffraction by an aperture 475 14.7.2 Diffraction gratings 476 14.7.3 Diffraction from crystal-like structures 477 14.7.4 Photonic crystals 478 14.8 Fibre optics 479 14.8.1 Optical communications 479 14.8.2 Attenuation in glass fibres 479 14.8.3 Dispersion and optical fibre design 480 14.8.4 Optical amplification 482 14.9 Energy conversion 483 14.9.1 Photoconductivity and photovoltaic solar cells 483 14.9.2 Dye sensitized solar cells 485 14.10 Nanostructures 486 14.10.1 The optical properties of quantum wells 486 14.10.2 The optical properties of nanoparticles 487 Further reading 489 Problems and exercises 489 15 Thermal properties 495 15.1 Heat capacity 495 15.1.1 The heat capacity of a solid 495 15.1.2 Classical theory of heat capacity 496 15.1.3 Quantum theory of heat capacity 496 15.1.4 Heat capacity at phase transitions 497 15.2 Thermal conductivity 498 15.2.1 Heat transfer 498 15.2.2 Thermal conductivity of solids 498 15.2.3 Thermal conductivity and microstructure 500 15.3 Expansion and contraction 501 15.3.1 Thermal expansion 501 15.3.2 Thermal expansion and interatomic potentials 502 15.3.3 Thermal contraction 503 15.3.4 Zero thermal contraction materials 505 15.4 Thermoelectric effects 506 15.4.1 Thermoelectric coefficients 506 15.4.2 Thermoelectric effects and charge carriers 508 15.4.3 The Seebeck coefficient of solids containing point defect populations 509 15.4.4 Thermocouples, power generation and refrigeration 509 15.5 The magnetocaloric effect 512 15.5.1 The magnetocaloric effect and adiabatic cooling 512 15.5.2 The giant magnetocaloric effect 513 Further reading 514 Problems and exercises 514 PART 5 NUCLEAR PROPERTIES OF SOLIDS 517 16 Radioactivity and nuclear reactions 519 16.1 Radioactivity 519 16.1.1 Naturally occurring radioactive elements 519 16.1.2 Isotopes and nuclides 520 16.1.3 Nuclear equations 520 16.1.4 Radioactive series 521 16.1.5 Nuclear stability 523 16.2 Artificial radioactive atoms 524 16.2.1 Transuranic elements 524 16.2.2 Artificial radioactivity in light elements 527 16.3 Nuclear decay 527 16.3.1 The rate of nuclear decay 527 16.3.2 Radioactive dating 529 16.4 Nuclear energy 531 16.4.1 The binding energy of nuclides 531 16.4.2 Nuclear fission 532 16.4.3 Thermal reactors for power generation 533 16.4.4 Fuel for space exploration 535 16.4.5 Fast breeder reactors 535 16.4.6 Fusion 535 16.4.7 Solar cycles 536 16.5 Nuclear waste 536 16.5.1 Nuclear accidents 537 16.5.2 The storage of nuclear waste 537 Further reading 538 Problems and exercises 539 Subject Index 543

Read more less

Book SynopsisHailed by the reviews as an extremely wide-ranging, useful book, this book provides a modern introduction to the chemistry and physics of solids. It offers a unique integrated approach, equally accessible to scientists and engineers.Trade Review“Summing Up: Recommended. Lower-division undergraduates and two-year technical program students.” (Choice, 1 February 2014)Table of ContentsPreface to the Second Edition xvii Preface to the First Edition xix PART 1 STRUCTURES AND MICROSTRUCTURES 1 1 The electron structure of atoms 3 1.1 The hydrogen atom 3 1.1.1 The quantum mechanical description 3 1.1.2 The energy of the electron 4 1.1.3 Electron orbitals 5 1.1.4 Orbital shapes 5 1.2 Many-electron atoms 7 1.2.1 The orbital approximation 7 1.2.2 Electron spin and electron configuration 7 1.2.3 The periodic table 9 1.3 Atomic energy levels 11 1.3.1 Spectra and energy levels 11 1.3.2 Terms and term symbols 11 1.3.3 Levels 13 1.3.4 Electronic energy level calculations 14 Further reading 15 Problems and exercises 16 2 Chemical bonding 19 2.1 Ionic bonding 19 2.1.1 Ions 19 2.1.2 Ionic size and shape 20 2.1.3 Lattice energies 21 2.1.4 Atomistic simulation 23 2.2 Covalent bonding 24 2.2.1 Valence bond theory 24 2.2.2 Molecular orbital theory 30 2.3 Metallic bonding and energy bands 35 2.3.1 Molecular orbitals and energy bands 36 2.3.2 The free electron gas 37 2.3.3 Energy bands 40 2.3.4 Properties of metals 41 2.3.5 Bands in ionic and covalent solids 43 2.3.6 Computation of properties 44 Further reading 45 Problems and exercises 46 3 States of aggregation 49 3.1 Weak chemical bonds 49 3.2 Macrostructures, microstructures and nanostructures 52 3.2.1 Structures and scale 52 3.2.2 Crystalline solids 52 3.2.3 Quasicrystals 53 3.2.4 Non-crystalline solids 54 3.2.5 Partly crystalline solids 55 3.2.6 Nanoparticles and nanostructures 55 3.3 The development of microstructures 57 3.3.1 Solidification 58 3.3.2 Processing 58 3.4 Point defects 60 3.4.1 Point defects in crystals of elements 60 3.4.2 Solid solutions 61 3.4.3 Schottky defects 62 3.4.4 Frenkel defects 63 3.4.5 Non-stoichiometric compounds 64 3.4.6 Point defect notation 66 3.5 Linear, planar and volume defects 68 3.5.1 Edge dislocations 68 3.5.2 Screw dislocations 69 3.5.3 Partial and mixed dislocations 69 3.5.4 Planar defects 69 3.5.5 Volume defects: precipitates 70 Further reading 73 Problems and exercises 73 4 Phase diagrams 77 4.1 Phases and phase diagrams 77 4.1.1 One-component (unary) systems 77 4.1.2 The phase rule for one-component (unary) systems 79 4.2 Binary phase diagrams 80 4.2.1 Two-component (binary) systems 80 4.2.2 The phase rule for two-component (binary) systems 81 4.2.3 Simple binary diagrams: nickel–copper as an example 81 4.2.4 Binary systems containing a eutectic point: tin–lead as an example 83 4.2.5 Intermediate phases and melting 87 4.3 The iron–carbon system near to iron 88 4.3.1 The iron–carbon phase diagram 88 4.3.2 Steels and cast irons 89 4.3.3 Invariant points 89 4.4 Ternary systems 90 4.5 Calculation of phase diagrams: CALPHAD 93 Further reading 94 Problems and exercises 94 5 Crystallography and crystal structures 101 5.1 Crystallography 101 5.1.1 Crystal lattices 101 5.1.2 Crystal systems and crystal structures 102 5.1.3 Symmetry and crystal classes 104 5.1.4 Crystal planes and Miller indices 106 5.1.5 Hexagonal crystals and Miller-Bravais indices 109 5.1.6 Directions 110 5.1.7 Crystal geometry and the reciprocal lattice 112 5.2 The determination of crystal structures 114 5.2.1 Single crystal X-ray diffraction 114 5.2.2 Powder X-ray diffraction and crystal identification 115 5.2.3 Neutron diffraction 118 5.2.4 Electron diffraction 118 5.3 Crystal structures 118 5.3.1 Unit cells, atomic coordinates and nomenclature 118 5.3.2 The density of a crystal 119 5.3.3 The cubic close-packed (A1) structure 121 5.3.4 The body-centred cubic (A2) structure 121 5.3.5 The hexagonal (A3) structure 122 5.3.6 The diamond (A4) structure 122 5.3.7 The graphite (A9) structure 123 5.3.8 The halite (rock salt, sodium chloride, B1) structure 123 5.3.9 The spinel (H11) structure 125 5.4 Structural relationships 126 5.4.1 Sphere packing 126 5.4.2 Ionic structures in terms of anion packing 128 5.4.3 Polyhedral representations 129 Further reading 131 Problems and exercises 131 PART 2 CLASSES OF MATERIALS 137 6 Metals, ceramics, polymers and composites 139 6.1 Metals 139 6.1.1 The crystal structures of pure metals 140 6.1.2 Metallic radii 141 6.1.3 Alloy solid solutions 142 6.1.4 Metallic glasses 145 6.1.5 The principal properties of metals 146 6.2 Ceramics 147 6.2.1 Bonding and structure of silicate ceramics 147 6.2.2 Some non-silicate ceramics 149 6.2.3 The preparation and processing of ceramics 152 6.2.4 The principal properties of ceramics 154 6.3 Silicate glasses 154 6.3.1 Bonding and structure of silicate glasses 155 6.3.2 Glass deformation 157 6.3.3 Strengthened glass 159 6.3.4 Glass-ceramics 160 6.4 Polymers 161 6.4.1 Polymer formation 162 6.4.2 Microstructures of polymers 165 6.4.3 Production of polymers 170 6.4.4 Elastomers 173 6.4.5 The principal properties of polymers 175 6.5 Composite materials 177 6.5.1 Fibre-reinforced plastics 177 6.5.2 Metal-matrix composites 177 6.5.3 Ceramic-matrix composites 178 6.5.4 Cement and concrete 178 Further reading 181 Problems and exercises 182 PART 3 REACTIONS AND TRANSFORMATIONS 189 7 Diffusion and ionic conductivity 191 7.1 Self-diffusion, tracer diffusion and tracer impurity diffusion 191 7.2 Non-steady-state diffusion 194 7.3 Steady-state diffusion 195 7.4 Temperature variation of diffusion coefficient 195 7.5 The effect of impurities 196 7.6 Random walk diffusion 197 7.7 Diffusion in solids 198 7.8 Self-diffusion in one dimension 199 7.9 Self-diffusion in crystals 201 7.10 The Arrhenius equation and point defects 202 7.11 Correlation factors for self-diffusion 204 7.12 Ionic conductivity 205 7.12.1 Ionic conductivity in solids 205 7.12.2 The relationship between ionic conductivity and diffusion coefficient 208 Further reading 209 Problems and exercises 209 8 Phase transformations and reactions 213 8.1 Sintering 213 8.1.1 Sintering and reaction 213 8.1.2 The driving force for sintering 215 8.1.3 The kinetics of neck growth 216 8.2 First-order and second-order phase transitions 216 8.2.1 First-order phase transitions 217 8.2.2 Second-order transitions 217 8.3 Displacive and reconstructive transitions 218 8.3.1 Displacive transitions 218 8.3.2 Reconstructive transitions 219 8.4 Order–disorder transitions 221 8.4.1 Positional ordering 221 8.4.2 Orientational ordering 222 8.5 Martensitic transformations 223 8.5.1 The austenite–martensite transition 223 8.5.2 Martensitic transformations in zirconia 226 8.5.3 Martensitic transitions in Ni–Ti alloys 227 8.5.4 Shape-memory alloys 228 8.6 Phase diagrams and microstructures 230 8.6.1 Equilibrium solidification of simple binary alloys 230 8.6.2 Non-equilibrium solidification and coring 230 8.6.3 Solidification in systems containing a eutectic point 231 8.6.4 Equilibrium heat treatment of steel in the Fe–C phase diagram 233 8.7 High-temperature oxidation of metals 236 8.7.1 Direct corrosion 236 8.7.2 The rate of oxidation 236 8.7.3 Oxide film microstructure 237 8.7.4 Film growth via diffusion 238 8.7.5 Alloys 239 8.8 Solid-state reactions 240 8.8.1 Spinel formation 240 8.8.2 The kinetics of spinel formation 241 Further reading 242 Problems and exercises 242 9 Oxidation and reduction 247 9.1 Galvanic cells 247 9.1.1 Cell basics 247 9.1.2 Standard electrode potentials 249 9.1.3 Cell potential and Gibbs energy 250 9.1.4 Concentration dependence 251 9.2 Chemical analysis using galvanic cells 251 9.2.1 pH meters 251 9.2.2 Ion selective electrodes 253 9.2.3 Oxygen sensors 254 9.3 Batteries 255 9.3.1 ‘Dry’ and alkaline primary batteries 255 9.3.2 Lithium-ion primary batteries 256 9.3.3 The lead–acid secondary battery 257 9.3.4 Lithium-ion secondary batteries 257 9.3.5 Lithium–air batteries 259 9.3.6 Fuel cells 260 9.4 Corrosion 262 9.4.1 The reaction of metals with water and aqueous acids 262 9.4.2 Dissimilar metal corrosion 264 9.4.3 Single metal electrochemical corrosion 265 9.5 Electrolysis 266 9.5.1 Electrolytic cells 267 9.5.2 Electroplating 267 9.5.3 The amount of product produced during electrolysis 268 9.5.4 The electrolytic preparation of titanium by the FFC Cambridge Process 269 9.6 Pourbaix diagrams 270 9.6.1 Passivation, corrosion and leaching 270 9.6.2 The stability field of water 270 9.6.3 Pourbaix diagram for a metal showing two valence states, M2þ and M3þ 271 9.6.4 Pourbaix diagram displaying tendency for corrosion 273 Further reading 274 Problems and exercises 275 PART 4 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES 279 10 Mechanical properties of solids 281 10.1 Strength and hardness 281 10.1.1 Strength 281 10.1.2 Stress and strain 282 10.1.3 Stress–strain curves 283 10.1.4 Toughness and stiffness 286 10.1.5 Superelasticity 286 10.1.6 Hardness 287 10.2 Elastic moduli 289 10.2.1 Young’s modulus (the modulus of elasticity) (E or Y) 289 10.2.2 Poisson’s ratio (n) 291 10.2.3 The longitudinal or axial modulus (L or M) 292 10.2.4 The shear modulus or modulus of rigidity (G or m) 292 10.2.5 The bulk modulus, K or B 293 10.2.6 The Lame modulus (l) 293 10.2.7 Relationships between the elastic moduli 293 10.2.8 Ultrasonic waves in elastic solids 293 10.3 Deformation and fracture 295 10.3.1 Brittle fracture 295 10.3.2 Plastic deformation of metals 298 10.3.3 Dislocation movement and plastic deformation 298 10.3.4 Brittle and ductile materials 301 10.3.5 Plastic deformation of polymers 302 10.3.6 Fracture following plastic deformation 302 10.3.7 Strengthening 304 10.3.8 Computation of deformation and fracture 306 10.4 Time-dependent properties 307 10.4.1 Fatigue 307 10.4.2 Creep 308 10.5 Nanoscale properties 312 10.5.1 Solid lubricants 312 10.5.2 Auxetic materials 313 10.5.3 Thin films and nanowires 315 10.6 Composite materials 317 10.6.1 Young’s modulus of large particle composites 317 10.6.2 Young’s modulus of fibre-reinforced composites 318 10.6.3 Young’s modulus of a two-phase system 319 Further reading 320 Problems and exercises 321 11 Insulating solids 327 11.1 Dielectrics 327 11.1.1 Relative permittivity and polarisation 327 11.1.2 Polarisability 329 11.1.3 Polarisability and relative permittivity 330 11.1.4 The frequency dependence of polarisability and relative permittivity 331 11.1.5 The relative permittivity of crystals 332 11.2 Piezoelectrics, pyroelectrics and ferroelectrics 333 11.2.1 The piezoelectric and pyroelectric effects 333 11.2.2 Crystal symmetry and the piezoelectric and pyroelectric effects 335 11.2.3 Piezoelectric mechanisms 336 11.2.4 Quartz oscillators 337 11.2.5 Piezoelectric polymers 338 11.3 Ferroelectrics 340 11.3.1 Ferroelectric crystals 340 11.3.2 Hysteresis and domain growth in ferroelectric crystals 341 11.3.3 Antiferroelectrics 344 11.3.4 The temperature dependence of ferroelectricity and antiferroelectricity 344 11.3.5 Ferroelectricity due to hydrogen bonds 345 11.3.6 Ferroelectricity due to polar groups 347 11.3.7 Ferroelectricity due to medium-sized transition-metal cations 348 11.3.8 Poling and polycrystalline ferroelectric solids 349 11.3.9 Doping and modification of properties 349 11.3.10 Relaxor ferroelectrics 351 11.3.11 Ferroelectric nanoparticles, thin films and superlattices 352 11.3.12 Flexoelectricity in ferroelectrics 353 Further reading 354 Problems and exercises 355 12 Magnetic solids 361 12.1 Magnetic materials 361 12.1.1 Characterisation of magnetic materials 361 12.1.2 Magnetic dipoles and magnetic flux 362 12.1.3 Atomic magnetism 363 12.1.4 Overview of magnetic materials 365 12.2 Paramagnetic materials 368 12.2.1 The magnetic moment of paramagnetic atoms and ions 368 12.2.2 High and low spin: crystal field effects 369 12.2.3 Temperature dependence of paramagnetic susceptibility 371 12.2.4 Pauli paramagnetism 373 12.3 Ferromagnetic materials 374 12.3.1 Ferromagnetism 374 12.3.2 Exchange energy 376 12.3.3 Domains 378 12.3.4 Hysteresis 380 12.3.5 Hard and soft magnetic materials 380 12.4 Antiferromagnetic materials and superexchange 381 12.5 Ferrimagnetic materials 382 12.5.1 Cubic spinel ferrites 382 12.5.2 Garnet structure ferrites 383 12.5.3 Hexagonal ferrites 383 12.5.4 Double exchange 384 12.6 Nanostructures 385 12.6.1 Small particles and data recording 385 12.6.2 Superparamagnetism and thin films 386 12.6.3 Superlattices 386 12.6.4 Photoinduced magnetism 387 12.7 Magnetic defects 389 12.7.1 Magnetic defects in semiconductors 389 12.7.2 Charge and spin states in cobaltites and manganites 390 Further reading 393 Problems and exercises 393 13 Electronic conductivity in solids 399 13.1 Metals 399 13.1.1 Metals, semiconductors and insulators 399 13.1.2 Electron drift in an electric field 401 13.1.3 Electronic conductivity 402 13.1.4 Resistivity 404 13.2 Semiconductors 405 13.2.1 Intrinsic semiconductors 405 13.2.2 Band gap measurement 407 13.2.3 Extrinsic semiconductors 408 13.2.4 Carrier concentrations in extrinsic semiconductors 409 13.2.5 Characterisation 411 13.2.6 The p-n junction diode 413 13.3 Metal–insulator transitions 416 13.3.1 Metals and insulators 416 13.3.2 Electron–electron repulsion 417 13.3.3 Modification of insulators 418 13.3.4 Transparent conducting oxides 419 13.4 Conducting polymers 420 13.5 Nanostructures and quantum confinement of electrons 423 13.5.1 Quantum wells 424 13.5.2 Quantum wires and quantum dots 425 13.6 Superconductivity 426 13.6.1 Superconductors 426 13.6.2 The effect of magnetic fields 427 13.6.3 The effect of current 428 13.6.4 The nature of superconductivity 428 13.6.5 Josephson junctions 430 13.6.6 Cuprate high-temperature superconductors 430 Further reading 438 Problems and exercises 438 14 Optical aspects of solids 445 14.1 Light 445 14.1.1 Light waves 445 14.1.2 Photons 447 14.2 Sources of light 449 14.2.1 Incandescence 449 14.2.2 Luminescence and phosphors 450 14.2.3 Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 453 14.2.4 Solid-state lasers 454 14.3 Colour and appearance 460 14.3.1 Luminous solids 460 14.3.2 Non-luminous solids 460 14.3.3 Attenuation 461 14.4 Refraction and dispersion 462 14.4.1 Refraction 462 14.4.2 Refractive index and structure 464 14.4.3 The refractive index of metals and semiconductors 465 14.4.4 Dispersion 465 14.5 Reflection 466 14.5.1 Reflection from a surface 466 14.5.2 Reflection from a single thin film 467 14.5.3 The reflectivity of a single thin film in air 469 14.5.4 The colour of a single thin film in air 469 14.5.5 The colour of a single thin film on a substrate 470 14.5.6 Low-reflectivity (antireflection) and high-reflectivity coatings 471 14.5.7 Multiple thin films and dielectric mirrors 471 14.6 Scattering 472 14.6.1 Rayleigh scattering 472 14.6.2 Mie scattering 475 14.7 Diffraction 475 14.7.1 Diffraction by an aperture 475 14.7.2 Diffraction gratings 476 14.7.3 Diffraction from crystal-like structures 477 14.7.4 Photonic crystals 478 14.8 Fibre optics 479 14.8.1 Optical communications 479 14.8.2 Attenuation in glass fibres 479 14.8.3 Dispersion and optical fibre design 480 14.8.4 Optical amplification 482 14.9 Energy conversion 483 14.9.1 Photoconductivity and photovoltaic solar cells 483 14.9.2 Dye sensitized solar cells 485 14.10 Nanostructures 486 14.10.1 The optical properties of quantum wells 486 14.10.2 The optical properties of nanoparticles 487 Further reading 489 Problems and exercises 489 15 Thermal properties 495 15.1 Heat capacity 495 15.1.1 The heat capacity of a solid 495 15.1.2 Classical theory of heat capacity 496 15.1.3 Quantum theory of heat capacity 496 15.1.4 Heat capacity at phase transitions 497 15.2 Thermal conductivity 498 15.2.1 Heat transfer 498 15.2.2 Thermal conductivity of solids 498 15.2.3 Thermal conductivity and microstructure 500 15.3 Expansion and contraction 501 15.3.1 Thermal expansion 501 15.3.2 Thermal expansion and interatomic potentials 502 15.3.3 Thermal contraction 503 15.3.4 Zero thermal contraction materials 505 15.4 Thermoelectric effects 506 15.4.1 Thermoelectric coefficients 506 15.4.2 Thermoelectric effects and charge carriers 508 15.4.3 The Seebeck coefficient of solids containing point defect populations 509 15.4.4 Thermocouples, power generation and refrigeration 509 15.5 The magnetocaloric effect 512 15.5.1 The magnetocaloric effect and adiabatic cooling 512 15.5.2 The giant magnetocaloric effect 513 Further reading 514 Problems and exercises 514 PART 5 NUCLEAR PROPERTIES OF SOLIDS 517 16 Radioactivity and nuclear reactions 519 16.1 Radioactivity 519 16.1.1 Naturally occurring radioactive elements 519 16.1.2 Isotopes and nuclides 520 16.1.3 Nuclear equations 520 16.1.4 Radioactive series 521 16.1.5 Nuclear stability 523 16.2 Artificial radioactive atoms 524 16.2.1 Transuranic elements 524 16.2.2 Artificial radioactivity in light elements 527 16.3 Nuclear decay 527 16.3.1 The rate of nuclear decay 527 16.3.2 Radioactive dating 529 16.4 Nuclear energy 531 16.4.1 The binding energy of nuclides 531 16.4.2 Nuclear fission 532 16.4.3 Thermal reactors for power generation 533 16.4.4 Fuel for space exploration 535 16.4.5 Fast breeder reactors 535 16.4.6 Fusion 535 16.4.7 Solar cycles 536 16.5 Nuclear waste 536 16.5.1 Nuclear accidents 537 16.5.2 The storage of nuclear waste 537 Further reading 538 Problems and exercises 539 Subject Index 543

Read more less

Book SynopsisOver the last several years, manufacturers have expressed increasing interest in reducing their energy consumption and have begun to search for opportunities to reduce their energy usage. In this book, the authors explore a variety of opportunities to reduce the energy footprint of manufacturing. These opportunities cover the entire spatial scale of the manufacturing enterprise: from unit process-oriented approaches to enterprise-level strategies. Each chapter examines some aspect of this spatial scale, and discusses and describes the opportunities that exist at that level. Case studies demonstrate how the opportunity may be acted on with practical guidance on how to respond to these opportunities.Table of Contents1 Introduction to Energy Efficient Manufacturing 1Barbara S. Linke and John W. Sutherland 1.1 Energy Use Implications 2 1.2 Drivers and Solutions for Energy Efficiency 3 References 9 2 Operation Planning & Monitoring 11Y.B. Guo 2.1 Unit Manufacturing Processes 11 2.2 Life Cycle Inventory (LCI) of Unit Manufacturing Process 13 2.3 Energy Consumption in Unit Manufacturing Process 16 2.3.1 Basic Concepts of Energy, Power, and Work 16 2.3.2 Framework of Energy Consumption 17 2.4 Operation Plan Relevance to Energy Consumption 19 2.5 Energy Accounting in Unit Manufacturing Processes 20 2.6 Processing Energy in Unit Manufacturing Process 21 2.6.1 Cases of Processing Energy Modeling 21 2.6.1.1 Forging 21 2.6.1.2 Orthogonal Cutting 22 2.6.1.3 Grinding 24 2.6.1.4 Specific Energy vs. MRR 25 2.6.2 Energy Measurement 26 2.7 Energy Reduction Opportunities 26 2.7.1 Shortening Process Chain by Hard Machining 28 2.7.2 Substitution of Process Steps 28 2.7.3 Hybrid processes 29 2.7.4 Adaptation of Cooling and Flushing Strategies 29 2.7.5 Remanufacturing 30 References 30 3 Materials Processing 33Karl R. Haapala, Sundar V. Atre, Ravi Enneti, Ian C. Garretson and Hao Zhang 3.1 Steel 34 3.1.1 Steelmaking Technology 35 3.2 Aluminum 36 3.2.1 Aluminum Alloying 37 3.2.2 History of Aluminum Processing 37 3.2.3 Aluminum in Commerce 38 3.2.4 Aluminum Processing 41 3.2.5 Bayer Process 42 3.2.6 Preparation of Carbon 44 3.2.7 Hall-Heroult Electrolytic Process 44 3.3 Titanium 45 3.3.1 Titanium Alloying 46 3.3.2 History of Titanium Processing 47 3.3.3 Titanium in Commerce 48 3.3.4 Titanium Processing Methods 49 3.3.5 Sulfate Process 50 3.3.6 Chloride Process 51 3.3.7 Hunter Process and Kroll Process 51 3.3.8 Remelting Processes 52 3.3.9 Emerging Titanium Processing Technologies 52 3.4 Polymers 54 3.4.1 Life Cycle Environmental and Cost Assessment 59 3.4.2 An Application of Polymer-Powder Processes 59 References 61 4 Energy Reduction in Manufacturing via Incremental Forming and Surface Microtexturing 65Jian Cao and Rajiv Malhotra 4.1 Incremental Forming 66 4.1.1 Conventional Forming Processes 66 4.1.2 Energy Reduction via Incremental Forming 72 4.1.3 Challenges in Incremental Forming 75 4.1.3.1 Toolpath Planning for Enhanced Geometric Accuracy and Process Flexibility 76 4.1.3.2 Formability Prediction and Deformation Mechanics 85 4.1.3.3 Process Innovation and Materials Capability in DSIF 92 4.1.3.4 Future Challenges in Incremental Forming 95 4.2 Surface Microtexturing 97 4.2.1 Energy Based Applications of Surface Microtexturing 97 4.2.1.1 Microtexturing for Friction Reduction 97 4.2.1.2 Microtexturing Methods 101 4.2.1.3 Future Work in Microtexturing 114 4.3 Summary 115 4.4 Acknowledgement 116 References 116 5 An Analysis of Energy Consumption and Energy Efficiency in Material Removal Processes 123Tao Lu and I.S. Jawahir 5.1 Overview 123 5.2 Plant and Workstation Levels 126 5.3 Operation Level 129 5.4 Process Optimization for Energy Consumption 134 5.4.1 Plant Level and Workstation Level 134 5.4.2 Operation Level 137 5.4.2.1 Turning Operation 137 5.4.2.2 Milling Operation 145 5.4.2.3 Drilling Operation 148 5.4.2.4 Grinding Operation 150 5.5 Conclusions 152 Reference 154 6 Nontraditional Removal Processes 159Murali Sundaram and K.P. Rajurkar 6.1 Introduction 159 6.1.2 Working Principle 160 6.1.2.1 Electrical Discharge Machining 160 6.1.2.2 Electrochemical Machining 161 6.1.2.3 Electrochemical Discharge Machining 163 6.1.2.4 Electrochemical Grinding 164 6.2 Energy Efficiency 165 Acknowledgments 167 References 167 7 Surface Treatment and Tribological Considerations 169S.R. Schmid and J. Jeswiet 7.1 Introduction 170 7.2 Surface Treatment Techniques 173 7.2.1 Surface Geometry Modification 174 7.2.2 Microstructural Modification 175 7.2.3 Chemical Approaches 179 7.3 Coating Operations 179 7.3.1 Hard Facing 179 7.3.2 Vapor Deposition 183 7.3.3 Miscellaneous Coating Operations 185 7.4 Tribology 189 7.5 Evolving Technologies 191 7.5.1 Biomimetics – Biologically Inspired Design 191 7.6 Micro Manufacturing 192 7.7 Conclusions 194 References 194 8 Joining Processes 197Amber Shrivastava, Manuela Krones and Frank E. Pfefferkorn 8.1 Introduction 198 8.2 Sustainability in Joining 200 8.3 Taxonomy 203 8.4 Data Sources 205 8.5 Efficiency of Joining Equipment 208 8.6 Efficiency of Joining Processes 210 8.6.1 Fusion Welding 211 8.6.2 Chemical Joining Methods 214 8.6.3 Solid-State Welding 216 8.6.4 Mechanical Joining Methods 218 8.6.4.1 Mechanical Fastening 218 8.6.4.2 Adhesive Bonding 219 8.7 Process Selection 220 8.8 Efficiency of Joining Facilities 221 8.9 Case Studies 224 8.9.1 Submerged Arc Welding (SAW) 224 8.9.2 Friction Stir Welding (FSW) 228 Reference 235 9 Manufacturing Equipment 239M. Helu, N. Diaz-Elsayed and D. Dornfeld 9.1 Introduction 239 9.2 Power Measurement 240 9.3 Characterizing the Power Demand 242 9.3.1 Constant Power 242 9.3.2 Variable Power 244 9.3.3 Processing Power 244 9.4 Energy Model 244 9.5 Life Cycle Energy Analysis of Production Equipment 246 9.6 Energy Reduction Strategies 247 9.6.1 Strategies for Equipment with High Processing Power 248 9.6.2 Strategies for Equipment with High Tare Power 249 9.6.2.1 Process Time 249 9.6.2.2 Machine Design 251 9.7 Additional Life Cycle Impacts of Energy Reduction Strategies 252 9.8 Summary 254 References 256 10 Energy Considerations in Assembly Operations 261Camelio, J.A., McCullough, D., Prosch, S. and Rickli, J.L. 10.1 Introduction to Assembly Systems & Operations 262 10.2 Fundamentals of Assembly Operations 263 10.3 Characterizing Assembly System Energy Consumption 264 10.3.1 Indirect Energy 265 10.3.2 Direct Energy 266 10.4 Direct Energy Considerations of Assembly Joining Processes 268 10.4.1 Mechanical Assembly 268 10.4.2 Adhesive Bonding 269 10.4.3 Welding, Brazing, and Soldering 272 10.5 Assembly System Energy Metrics 275 10.6 Case Study: Heavy Duty Truck Assembly 280 10.6.1 Case Study Energy Consumption Analysis Approach 280 10.6.2 Assembly Process Categorization 281 10.6.3 Case Study Energy Analysis Results 285 10.6.4 Discussion and Recommendations 292 10.7 Future of Energy Efficient Assembly Operations 293 References 294 Appendix 10.A 296 11 Manufacturing Facility Energy Improvement 299Chris Yuan, Junling Xie and John Nicol 11.1 Introduction 300 11.2 Auxiliary Industrial Energy Consumptions 303 11.2.1 Lighting 303 11.2.1.1 Lighting Technologies 304 11.2.1.2 Opportunities for Improving Energy Efficiency of Industrial Lighting 305 11.2.2 HVAC 307 11.2.2.1 HVAC Systems 308 11.2.2.2 HVAC Energy Efficiency Opportunities 310 11.2.3 Compressed Air 315 11.2.3.1 Compressed Air Technologies 316 11.2.3.2 Improving Energy Efficiency of Air Compressors 317 11.3 Industrial Practices on Energy Assessment and Energy Efficiency Improvement 321 11.3.1 Types of Energy Assessments 321 11.3.2 Energy Assessment Procedures 322 11.4 Energy Management and its Enhancement Approaches 323 11.4.1 Energy Management Description and Benefits 324 11.4.2 Establishing an Energy Management Approach 326 11.4.2.1 ISO 50001 336 11.5 Conclusions 337 References 338 12 Energy Efficient Manufacturing Process Planning 339RuixueYin, Fu Zhao and John W. Sutherland 12.1 Introduction 339 12.2 The Basics of Process Planning 341 12.2.1 Types of Production 342 12.2.2 Process Planning Procedure 344 12.2.3 Process Planning Methods 346 12.3 Energy Efficient Process Planning 350 12.3.1 Energy Consumption and Carbon Footprint Models of Manufacturing Processes 350 12.3.2 A Semi-Generative Process Planning Approach for Energy Efficiency 351 12.4 Case Study 353 12.5 Conclusions 357 Reference 358 13 Scheduling for Energy Efficient Manufacturing 359Nelson A. Uhan, Andrew Liu and Fu Zhao 13.1 Introduction 359 13.2 A Brief Introduction to Scheduling 360 13.2.1 Machine Environments 360 13.2.2 Job Characteristics 362 13.3.3 Feasible Schedules and Gantt Charts 362 13.2.4 Objective Functions: Classic Time-Based Objectives 364 13.3 Machine Environments 365 13.4 Job Characteristics 367 13.4.1 A Very Brief Introduction to Mathematical Optimization 368 13.4.2 A Time-Indexed Integer Linear Program for the Energy-Efficient Flow Shop Problem 370 13.4.3 Algorithms for Solving Integer Linear Programs 376 13.5 Conclusion and Additional Reading 377 References 379 14 Energy Efficiency in the Supply Chain 381Thomas J. Goldsby and Fazleena Badurdeen 14.1 Supply Chain Management 381 14.2 Supply Chain Structure 382 14.3 Supply Chain Processes 385 14.3.1 Customer Relationship Management 387 14.3.2 Supplier Relationship Management 388 14.3.3 Customer Service Management 389 14.3.4 Demand Management 390 14.3.5 Manufacturing Flow Management 391 14.3.6 Order Fulfillment 392 14.3.7 Product Development and Commercialization 393 14.3.8 Returns Management 394 14.4 Supply Chain Management Components 395 14.5 Conclusion 396 References 396 Endnotes 400 15 Business Models and Organizational Strategies 401Omar Romero-Hernandez, David Hirsch, Sergio Romero and Sara Beckman 15.1 Introduction 402 15.2 Reference Framework for Selection of Energy Efficiency Projects 404 15.2.1 Mission and Drivers 405 15.2.2 Set Level of Assessment 405 15.2.3 Recognize Opportunities and Risk 406 15.2.4 Select Projects 406 15.2.5 Implementation and Communication 407 15.3 Common Energy Efficiency Opportunities 408 15.3.1 Building Envelope 408 15.3.2 Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) 409 15.3.3 Efficient Lighting 410 15.3.4 Efficient Motors and Systems 411 15.3.5 Building Management Systems 412 15.4 Stakeholders 413 15.4.1 Tenants and Owners 413 15.4.2 Regulators 414 15.4.3 Banks/Lenders 414 15.4.4 Energy Service Companies (ESCOs) 415 15.4.5 Business Models 415 15.5 Conclusions 417 References 417 16 Energy Efficient or Energy Effective Manufacturing? 421S. A. Shade and J. W. Sutherland 16.1 Energy Efficiency: A Macro Perspective 422 16.1.1 Government Perspective 422 16.1.2 Company Perspective 423 16.2 The Basics of Energy Efficiency 425 16.3 Limitations of Energy Efficiency 433 16.4 Energy Effectiveness 436 16.4.1 Effectiveness – It’s Up to the Decision Maker 438 16.4.2 Effectiveness – A Choice on Where to Invest 439 16.4.3 Effectiveness – Is An Action Really Worthwhile? 439 16.5 Summary 442 16.6 Acknowledgments 443 References 443 Index 445

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe automotive industry faces many challenges, including increased global competition, the need for higher-performance vehicles, a reduction in costs and tighter environmental and safety requirements. The materials used in automotive engineering play key roles in overcoming these issues: ultimately lighter materials mean lighter vehicles and lower emissions. Composites are being used increasingly in the automotive industry due to their strength, quality and light weight. Advanced Composite Materials for Automotive Applications: Structural Integrity and Crashworthiness provides a comprehensive explanation of how advanced composite materials, including FRPs, reinforced thermoplastics, carbon-based composites and many others, are designed, processed and utilized in vehicles. It includes technical explanations of composite materials in vehicle design and analysis and covers all phases of composite design, modelling, testing and failure analysis. It also sheds light on the Table of ContentsAbout the Editor xv List of Contributors xvii Series Preface xxi Preface xxiii Part One FUNDAMENTAL BACKGROUND 1 Overview of Composite Materials and their Automotive Applications 3 Ali Hallal, Ahmed Elmarakbi, Ali Shaito and Hicham El-Hage 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Polymer Composite Materials 5 1.3 Application of Composite Materials in the Automotive Industry 12 1.4 Green Composites for Automotive Applications 17 1.5 Modelling the Mechanical Behaviour of Composite Materials 19 1.6 Discussion 22 1.7 Conclusion 23 References 24 2 High-Volume Thermoplastic Composite Technology for Automotive Structures 29 Neil Reynolds and Arun Balan Ramamohan 2.1 Introduction – Opportunities for Thermoplastic Composites 29 2.2 Recent Developments in Automotive TPCs 31 2.3 Case Study: Rapid Stamp-Formed Thermoplastic Composites 34 2.4 Conclusion 48 Acknowledgements 49 References 49 3 Development of Low-Cost Carbon Fibre for Automotive Applications 51 Alan Wheatley, David Warren, and Sujit Das 3.1 Introduction 51 3.2 Research Drivers: Energy Efficiency 52 3.3 Lightweight Automotive Materials 53 3.4 Barriers to Carbon Fibre Adoption in the Automotive Industry 55 3.5 Global Production and the Market for Carbon Fibre 58 3.6 Low-Cost Carbon Fibre Programme 60 3.7 International Cooperation 72 Acknowledgements 72 References 72 Part Two IMPACT AND CRASH ANALYSIS 4 Mechanical Properties of Advanced Pore Morphology Foam Composites 77 Matej Vesenjak, Lovre Krstulovi´c-Opara and Zoran Ren 4.1 Introduction 77 4.2 Cellular Materials 78 4.3 Advanced Pore Morphology Foam 83 4.4 Mechanical Properties of Single APM Foam Elements 84 4.5 Behaviour of Composite APM Foam 89 4.6 Conclusion 96 Acknowledgements 96 References 96 5 Automotive Composite Structures for Crashworthiness 99 Dirk H.-J.A. Lukaszewicz 5.1 Introduction 99 5.2 Traffic Safety 99 5.3 Alternative Vehicles 101 5.4 Selective Overview of Worldwide Crash Tests 103 5.5 Structural Crash Management 106 5.6 Composite Materials for Crash Applications 110 5.7 Energy Absorption of Composite Profiles 115 5.8 Conclusion 124 Acknowledgements 125 References 125 6 Crashworthiness Analysis of Composite and Thermoplastic Foam Structure for Automotive Bumper Subsystem 129 Ermias Koricho, Giovanni Belingardi, Alem Tekalign, Davide Roncato and Brunetto Martorana 6.1 Introduction 129 6.2 Materials for Automotive Applications 132 6.3 Composite and Thermoplastic Materials 133 6.4 Numerical Modelling of Fiat 500 Frontal Transverse Beam 137 6.5 Standards for Low-Speed Frontal Impact 141 6.6 Bumper Beam Thickness Determination 141 6.7 Results and Discussion 142 6.8 Conclusion 145 References 146 7 Hybrid Structures Consisting of Sheet Metal and Fibre Reinforced Plastics for Structural Automotive Applications 149 Christian Lauter, Thomas Tr¨oster and Corin Reuter 7.1 Introduction and Motivation 149 7.2 Conventional Method for the Development of Composite Structures 150 7.3 Approaches to Automotive Lightweight Construction 151 7.4 Requirements for Automotive Structures 154 7.5 Simulation 158 7.6 Manufacturing 160 7.7 Testing 165 7.8 New Methodology for the Product Engineering of Hybrid Lightweight Structures 170 7.9 Conclusion 172 References 172 8 Nonlinear Strain Rate Dependent Micro-Mechanical Composite Material Model for Crashworthiness Simulation 175 Ala Tabiei 8.1 Introduction 175 8.2 Micro-Mechanical Formulation 175 8.3 Strain Rate Dependent Effects 188 8.4 Numerical Results 197 8.5 Conclusion 203 References 203 9 Design Solutions to Improve CFRP Crash-Box Impact Efficiency for Racing Applications 205 Simonetta Boria 9.1 Introduction 205 9.2 Composite Structures for Crashworthy Applications 207 9.3 Geometrical and Material Characterisation of the Impact Attenuator 214 9.4 Experimental Test 216 9.5 Finite Element Analysis and LS-DYNA 219 9.6 Comparison between Numerical and Experimental Analysis 220 9.7 Investigation of the Optimal Solution 221 9.8 Conclusion 224 References 224 Part Three DAMAGE AND FAILURE 10 Fracture and Failure Mechanisms for Different Loading Modes in Unidirectional Carbon Fibre/Epoxy Composites 229 Victoria Mollon, Jorge Bonhomme, Jaime Vina and Antonio Arguelles 10.1 Introduction 229 10.2 Delamination Failure 230 10.3 Objectives 232 10.4 Experimental Programme 233 10.5 Numerical Simulations 240 10.6 Fractography 244 10.7 Results and Discussion 244 10.8 Conclusion 253 References 253 11 Numerical Simulation of Damages in FRP Laminated Structures under Transverse Quasi-Static or Low-Velocity Impact Loads 257 Ning Hu, Ahmed Elmarakbi, Alamusi, Yaolu Liu, Hisao Fukunaga, Satoshi Atobe and Tomonori Watanabe 11.1 Introduction 257 11.2 Theory 261 11.3 Techniques for Overcoming Numerical Instability in Simulation of Delamination Propagation 267 11.4 Numerical Examples 275 11.5 Conclusion 291 References 291 12 Building Delamination Fracture Envelope under Mode I/Mode II Loading for FRP Composite Materials 293 Othman Al-Khudairi, Homayoun Hadavinia, Eoin Lewis, Barnaby Osborne and Lee S. Bryars 12.1 Introduction 293 12.2 Experimental Studies 294 12.3 Mode I Delamination Testing: Double Cantilever Bending Test Analysis and Results 296 12.4 Mode II Delamination Testing: End Notched Flexure Test Analysis and Results 297 12.5 Mixed Mode I/II Delamination Testing: Mixed-Mode Bending Test Analysis and Results 302 12.6 Fracture Failure Envelope 306 12.7 Conclusion 308 Nomenclature 309 References 309 Part Four CASE STUDIES AND DESIGNS 13 Metal Matrix Composites for Automotive Applications 313 Anthony Macke, Benjamin F. Schultz, Pradeep K. Rohatgi and Nikhil Gupta 13.1 Automotive Technologies 313 13.2 Reinforcements 321 13.3 Automotive Applications 328 13.4 Conclusion 342 Acknowledgements 343 References 343 14 Development of a Composite Wheel with Integrated Hub Motor and Requirements on Safety Components in Composite 345 Nicole Schweizer and Andreas B¨uter 14.1 Introduction 345 14.2 Wheels Made from FRPs 349 14.3 Development of a Composite Wheel with Integrated Electric Motor 358 14.4 Multifunctional Design – Requirements regarding Structural Durability and System Reliability 364 14.5 Conclusion 369 References 370 15 Composite Materials in Automotive Body Panels, Concerning Noise and Vibration 371 Peyman Honarmandi 15.1 Introduction 371 15.2 Composite Materials in Automobile Bodies 371 15.3 Multilayer Composite Materials in Noise and Vibration Treatment 372 15.4 Case Studies 373 15.5 Conclusion 386 References 387 16 Composite Materials for Automotive Braking Systems 389 David C. Barton 16.1 Introduction 389 16.2 Materials Requirements for Brake Rotors 390 16.3 Cast Iron Rotors 392 16.4 Carbon Composite Rotors 393 16.5 Light Alloy Composite Rotors 395 16.6 Evaluation of Composite Disc Materials 395 16.7 Surface Engineering of Light Alloy Brake Discs 398 16.8 Friction Material 400 16.9 Conclusion 402 References 403 17 Low-Cost Carbon Fibre: Applications, Performance and Cost Models 405 Alan Wheatley, David Warren and Sujit Das 17.1 Current and Proposed Carbon Fibre Applications 405 17.2 Carbon Fibre Polymer Composites: Cost Benefits and Obstacles for Automobiles 407 17.3 Performance Modelling 414 17.4 Cost Modelling 427 17.5 Conclusion 433 Acknowledgements 433 References 433 Index 435

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe must-have manual to understand and use the latest edition of the Fifth Edition The professional standard in the field of project management, A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK GuideFifth Edition) published by the Project Management Institute (PMI) serves as the ultimate resource for professionals and as a valuable studying and training device for students taking the PMP Exam. A User''s Manual to the PMBOK Guide takes the next logical step to act as a true user''s manual. With an accessible format and easy-to-understand language, it helps to not only distill essential information contained in the PMBOK GuideFifth Edition, but also fills an educational gap by offering instruction on how to apply its various tools and techniques. This edition of the User''s Manual: Defines each project management process in the PMBOK GuideFifth Edition, describes the intent, and discusses the individTable of ContentsPreface ix Acknowledgements xi Chapter 1 Introduction 1 About This Book 1 Project Management Process Groups 2 Project Management Knowledge Areas 4 Chapter 2 Key Concepts 7 Projects, Programs, and Portfolios 7 Project Life Cycles 8 Progressive Elaboration 9 Tailoring 9 Enterprise Environmental Factors 9 Organizational Process Assets 10 Chapter 3 Initiating a Project 13 Initiating Process Group 13 Project Sponsor Role 13 Project Manager Role 14 Develop Project Charter 15 Identify Stakeholders 18 Chapter 4 Planning Integration 23 Planning Process Group 23 Planning Loops 24 Project Integration Management 25 Develop Project Management Plan 26 Chapter 5 Planning Scope 31 Project Scope Management 31 Plan Scope Management 32 Collect Requirements 35 Defi ne Scope 43 Create WBS 46 Chapter 6 Planning the Schedule 53 Project Time Management 53 Plan Schedule Management 54 Defi ne Activities 56 Sequence Activities 59 Estimate Activity Resources 63 Estimate Activity Durations 68 Develop Schedule 73 Chapter 7 Planning Cost 85 Project Cost Management 85 Plan Cost Management 85 Estimate Costs 88 Determine Budget 94 Chapter 8 Planning Quality 99 Project Quality Management 99 Plan Quality Management 101 Chapter 9 Planning Human Resources 111 Project Human Resource Management 111 Plan Human Resource Management 112 Chapter 10 Planning Communications 117 Project Communications Management 117 Plan Communications Management 117 Chapter 11 Planning Risk 123 Project Risk Management 123 Plan Risk Management 124 Identify Risks 129 Perform Qualitative Risk Analysis 134 Perform Quantitative Risk Analysis 138 Plan Risk Responses 142 Chapter 12 Planning Procurement 147 Project Procurement Management 147 Plan Procurement Management 148 Chapter 13 Planning Stakeholder Management 157 Project Stakeholder Management 157 Plan Stakeholder Management 157 Chapter 14 Executing the Project 161 Executing Process Group 161 Direct and Manage Project Work 162 Chapter 15 Executing Quality Management 167 Perform Quality Assurance 167 Chapter 16 Executing Human Resource Management 173 Acquire Project Team 173 Develop Project Team 176 Manage Project Team 181 Chapter 17 Executing Communications Management 187 Manage Communications 187 Chapter 18 Executing Procurement Management 191 Conduct Procurements 191 Chapter 19 Executing Stakeholder Management 197 Manage Stakeholder Engagement 197 Chapter 20 Monitoring and Controlling the Project 201 Monitoring and Controlling Process Group 201 Monitor and Control Project Work 202 Perform Integrated Change Control 205 Chapter 21 Monitoring and Controlling Scope 211 Validate Scope 211 Control Scope 213 Chapter 22 Monitoring and Controlling the Schedule 217 Control Schedule 217 Chapter 23 Monitoring and Controlling Cost 221 Control Costs 221 Chapter 24 Monitoring and Controlling Quality 231 Control Quality 231 Chapter 25 Monitoring and Controlling Communications 237 Control Communications 237 Chapter 26 Monitoring and Controlling Risks 241 Control Risks 241 Chapter 27 Monitoring and Controlling Procurements 245 Control Procurements 245 Chapter 28 Monitoring and Controlling Stakeholder Engagement 251 Control Stakeholder Engagement 251 Chapter 29 Closing the Project 255 Closing Process Group 255 Close Project or Phase 255 Close Procurements 258 Appendix 261 Index 289

Read more less

Book SynopsisFully updated second edition of the premier reference book on muffler and lined duct acoustical performance Engine exhaust noise pollutes the street environment and ventilation fan noise enters dwellings along with fresh air. People have become conscious of their working environment.Table of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Propagation of Waves in Ducts 1 1.1 Plane Waves in an Inviscid Stationary Medium 2 1.2 Three-Dimensional Waves in an Inviscid Stationary Medium 5 1.3 Waves in a Viscous Stationary Medium 12 1.4 Plane Waves in an Inviscid Moving Medium 16 1.5 Three-Dimensional Waves in an Inviscid Moving Medium 18 1.6 One-Dimensional Waves in a Viscous Moving Medium 20 1.7 Waves in Ducts with Compliant Walls (Dissipative Ducts) 23 1.8 Three-Dimensional Waves along Elliptical Ducts 34 References 39 2 Theory of Acoustic Filters 41 2.1 Units for the Measurement of Sound 41 2.2 Uniform Tube 43 2.3 Radiation Impedance 46 2.4 Reflection Coefficient at an Open End 48 2.5 A Lumped Inertance 49 2.6 A Lumped Compliance 50 2.7 End Correction 51 2.8 Electroacoustic Analogies 51 2.9 Electrical Circuit Representation of an Acoustic System 52 2.10 Acoustical Filter Performance Parameters 53 2.11 Lumped-Element Representations of a Tube 58 2.12 Simple Area Discontinuities 60 2.13 Gradual Area Changes 62 2.14 Extended-Tube Resonators 67 2.15 Helmholtz Resonator 69 2.16 Concentric Hole-Cavity Resonator 70 2.17 An Illustration of the Classical Method of Filter Evaluation 71 2.18 The Transfer Matrix Method 74 2.19 TL of a Simple Expansion Chamber Muffler 85 2.20 An Algebraic Algorithm for Tubular Mufflers 88 2.21 Synthesis Criteria for Low-Pass Acoustic Filters 91 References 94 3 Flow-Acoustic Analysis of Cascaded-Element Mufflers 97 3.1 The Exhaust Process 97 3.2 Finite Amplitude Wave Effects 101 3.3 Mean Flow and Acoustic Energy Flux 102 3.4 Aeroacoustic State Variables 105 3.5 Aeroacoustic Radiation 108 3.6 Insertion Loss 111 3.7 Transfer Matrices for Tubular Elements 112 3.8 Perforated Elements with Two Interacting Ducts 119 3.9 Acoustic Impedance of Perforates 126 3.10 Matrizant Approach 129 3.11 Perforated Elements with Three Interacting Ducts 131 3.12 Other Elements Constituting Cascaded-Element Mufflers 137 References 143 4 Flow-Acoustic Analysis of Multiply-Connected Perforated Element Mufflers 147 4.1 Herschel-Quincke Tube Phenomenon 147 4.2 Perforated Element with Several Interacting Ducts 151 4.3 Three-Pass Double-Reversal Muffler 154 4.4 Flow-Reversal End Chambers 158 4.5 Meanflow Lumped Resistance Network Theory 163 4.6 Meanflow Distribution and Back Pressure Estimation 169 4.7 Integrated Transfer Matrix Approach 175 References 186 5 Flow-Acoustic Measurements 187 5.1 Impedance of a Passive Subsystem or Termination 187 5.2 Four-Pole Parameters of a Flow-Acoustic Element or Subsystem 203 5.3 An Active Termination – Aeroacoustic Characteristics of a Source 210 References 229 6 Dissipative Ducts and Parallel Baffle Mufflers 233 6.1 Acoustically Lined Rectangular Duct with Moving Medium 234 6.2 Acoustically Lined Circular Duct with Moving Medium 239 6.3 Transfer Matrix Relation for a Dissipative Duct 241 6.4 Transverse Wave Numbers for a Stationary Medium 244 6.5 Normal Impedance of the Lining 245 6.6 Transmission Loss 249 6.7 Effect of Protective Layer 251 6.8 Parallel Baffle Muffler 257 6.9 The Effect of Mean Flow 259 6.10 The Effect of Terminations on the Performance of Dissipative Ducts 260 6.11 Lined Bends 261 6.12 Plenum Chambers 261 6.13 Flow-Generated Noise 262 6.14 Insertion Loss of Parallel Baffle Mufflers 263 References 264 7 Three-Dimensional Analysis of Mufflers 267 7.1 Collocation Method for Simple Expansion Chambers 268 7.2 Finite Element Methods for Mufflers 275 7.3 Green’s Function Method for a Rectangular Cavity 292 7.4 Green’s Function Method for Circular Cylindrical Chambers 301 7.5 Green’s Function Method for Elliptical Cylindrical Chambers 303 7.6 Breakout Noise 306 References 316 8 Design of Mufflers 321 8.1 Requirements of an Engine Exhaust Muffler 321 8.2 Simple Expansion Chamber 322 8.3 Double-Tuned Extended-Tube Expansion Chamber 324 8.4 Tuned Concentric Tube Resonator 326 8.5 Plug Mufflers 327 8.6 Side-Inlet Side-Outlet Mufflers 329 8.7 Designing for Insertion Loss 331 8.8 Three-Pass Double-Reversal Chamber Mufflers 338 8.9 Perforated Baffle Muffler 347 8.10 Forked Dual Muffler System 349 8.11 Design of Short Elliptical and Circular Chambers 353 8.12 Back-Pressure Considerations 362 8.13 Practical Considerations 365 8.14 Design of Mufflers for Ventilation Systems 367 8.15 Active Sound Attenuation 369 References 375 Appendix A: Bessel Functions and Some of Their Properties 377 Appendix B: Entropy Changes in Adiabatic Flows 381 B.1 Stagnation Pressure and Entropy 381 B.2 Pressure, Density, and Entropy 382 Appendix C: Nomenclature 385 Index 389

Read more less

Book SynopsisFocusing on basic lubrication problems this book offers specific engineering applications. The book introduces methods and programs for the most important lubrication problems and their solutions. It is divided into four parts. The first part is about the general solving methods of the Reynolds equation, including solutions of Reynolds equations with different conditions and their discrete forms, such as a steady-state incompressible slider, journal bearing, dynamic bearing, gas bearing and grease lubrication. The second part gives the energy equation solution'. The third part introduces methods and programs for elasto-hydrodynamic lurbication, which links the Reynolds equation with the elastic deformation equation. The final part presents application lubrication programs used in engineering. Provides numerical solution methodologies including appropriate software for the hydrodynamic and elasto-hydrodynamic lubrication of bearings Offers a clear introduction aTable of ContentsPreface xv Part 1 NUMERICAL METHOD FOR REYNOLDS EQUATION 1 1 Reynolds Equation and its Discrete Form 3 1.1 General Reynolds Equation and Its Boundary Conditions 3 1.1.1 Reynolds Equation 3 1.1.2 Definite Condition 3 1.1.3 Computation of Lubrication Performances 5 1.2 Reynolds Equations for Some Special Working Conditions 6 1.2.1 Slider and Thrust Bearing 6 1.2.2 Journal Bearing 7 1.2.3 Hydrostatic Lubrication 8 1.2.4 Squeeze Bearing 9 1.2.5 Dynamic Bearing 9 1.2.6 Gas Bearing 10 1.3 Finite Difference Method of Reynolds Equation 10 1.3.1 Discretization of Equation 11 1.3.2 Difference Form of Reynolds Equation 12 1.3.3 Iteration of Differential Equation 13 1.3.4 Iteration Convergence Condition 13 2 Numerical Method and Program for Incompressible and Steady Lubrication of One-dimensional Slider 17 2.1 Basic Equations 17 2.1.1 Reynolds Equation 17 2.1.2 Boundary Conditions 18 2.1.3 Continuity Equation 18 2.2 Numerical Method for Incompressible and Steady Lubrication of One-dimensional Slider 18 2.2.1 Discrete Reynolds Equation 19 2.3 Calculation Program for Incompressible and Steady Lubrication of One-dimensional Slider 20 2.3.1 Introduction 20 2.3.2 Calculation Diagram 21 2.3.3 Calculation Program 21 2.3.4 Calculation Results 24 3 Numerical Method and Program for Incompressible and Steady Lubrication of Two-dimensional Slider 25 3.1 Basic Equations 25 3.2 Discrete Reynolds Equation 26 3.3 Calculation Program for Incompressible and Steady Lubrication of Two-dimensional Slider 27 3.3.1 Introduction 27 3.3.2 Calculation Diagram 27 3.3.3 Calculation Program 28 3.3.4 Calculation Results 31 4 Numerical Method and Program for Incompressible and Steady Lubrication of Journal Bearing 33 4.1 Basic Equations 33 4.1.1 Axis Position and Clearance Shape 33 4.1.2 Reynolds Equation 34 4.2 Numerical Method for Incompressible and Steady Lubrication of Journal Bearing 35 4.2.1 Dimensionless Reynolds Equation 35 4.2.2 Discrete Form of Reynolds Equation 36 4.3 Calculation Program for Incompressible and Steady Lubrication of Journal Bearing 37 4.3.1 Calculation Diagram 37 4.3.2 Calculation Program 38 4.3.3 Calculation Results 40 5 Numerical Method and Program for Incompressible Squeeze Lubrication 41 5.1 Basic Equation 41 5.2 Numerical Method and Program for Rectangular Plane Squeeze 42 5.2.1 Basic Equations 42 5.2.2 Numerical Method 42 5.2.3 Calculation Diagram 43 5.2.4 Calculation Program 44 5.2.5 Calculation Results 47 5.3 Numerical Method and Program for Disc Squeeze 47 5.3.1 Basic Equations 47 5.3.2 Numerical Method 48 5.3.3 Calculation Diagram 48 5.3.4 Calculation Program 49 5.3.5 Calculation Results 52 5.4 Numerical Method and Program for Journal Bearing Squeeze 52 5.4.1 Basic Equations 52 5.4.2 Numerical Method 54 5.4.3 Calculation Diagram 54 5.4.4 Calculation Program 55 5.4.5 Calculation Results 60 6 Numerical Method and Program for Dynamic Bearing 61 6.1 Basic Equations 61 6.2 Numerical Method for Trace of Journal Center 65 6.2.1 Introduction 65 6.2.2 Calculation Steps 66 6.3 Calculation Program for Dynamic Journal Bearing 67 6.3.1 Introduction 67 6.3.2 Calculation Diagram 67 6.3.3 Calculation Program 68 6.3.4 Calculation Results 82 7 Numerical Method and Program for Gas Lubrication 85 7.1 Basic Equations 85 7.1.1 General Reynolds Equation of Gas Lubrication 85 7.2 Numerical Method of Gas Lubrication 86 7.2.1 Basic Equations of Steady and Isothermal Gas Lubrication 86 7.2.2 Numerical Method 87 7.3 Calculation Program for Gas Lubrication 88 7.3.1 Calculation Program and Solutions of One-Dimensional Gas Lubrication 88 7.3.2 Numerical Program and Solutions of Two-Dimensional Gas Lubrication 91 7.3.3 Numerical Program and Solutions of Journal Bearing Gas Lubrication 94 8 Numerical Method and Program for Rarefied Gas Lubrication 97 8.1 Basic Equations 97 8.2 Numerical Method of Rarefied Gas Lubrication 99 8.2.1 Rarefied Gas Lubrication Model 99 8.2.2 Treatment of the Ultra-Thin Gas Film Lubrication Equation 100 8.3 Discretization and Iteration of Modified Reynolds Equation 101 8.3.1 Discrete Equation 101 8.3.2 Iteration Method 101 8.4 Calculation Program for Rarefied Gas Lubrication of Slider 102 8.4.1 Procedures Introduction 102 8.4.2 Calculation Diagram 102 8.4.3 Calculation Program 102 8.4.4 Calculation Results 106 9 Numerical Method and Program for One-dimensional Grease Lubrication 107 9.1 Basic Equations 107 9.1.1 Introduction 107 9.1.2 Constitutive Equations of Grease 108 9.1.3 Reynolds Equation 109 9.2 Numerical Method of One-Dimensional Grease Lubrication 109 9.3 Calculation Program of One-Dimensional Grease Lubrication 110 9.3.1 Calculation Diagram 110 9.3.2 Calculation Program 111 9.3.3 Calculation Results 113 Part 2 NUMERICAL METHOD FOR ENERGY EQUATION 115 10 Energy Equation and its Discrete Form 117 10.1 Basic Equations 117 10.1.1 Simplified Energy Equation 118 10.1.2 Boundary Conditions 118 10.1.3 Numerical Method 119 10.2 Influence of Temperature on Lubricant Performance 120 10.2.1 Viscosity–Temperature Equation 120 10.2.2 Density–Temperature Equation 120 10.3 Numerical Method for Thermal Hydrodynamic Lubrication 121 10.3.1 Methods and Program for One-dimensional Thermal Hydrodynamic Lubrication 121 10.3.2 Numerical Method and Program for Two-dimensional Thermal Hydrodynamic Lubrication 124 11 Numerical Method and Program for Incompressible and Steady Thermal Hydrodynamic Lubrication of Journal Bearing 131 11.1 Basic Equations 131 11.1.1 Reynolds Equation 131 11.1.2 Energy Equation 132 11.1.3 Viscosity–Temperature Equation 132 11.2 Numerical Method 132 11.2.1 Discrete Reynolds Equation 132 11.2.2 Discrete Energy Equation 133 11.2.3 Temperature–Viscosity Equation 133 11.3 Calculation Program 133 11.3.1 Calculation Diagram 133 11.3.2 Calculation Program 134 11.3.3 Calculation Results 138 Part 3 NUMERICAL METHOD FOR ELASTIC DEFORMATION AND THERMAL ELASTOHYDRODYNAMIC LUBRICATION 141 12 Numerical Method and Program for Elastic Deformation and Viscosity–Pressure Equation 143 12.1 Basic Equations of Elastic Deformation 143 12.1.1 Film Thickness Equation 143 12.1.2 Elastic Deformation Equation 143 12.2 Numerical Methods and Programs of Elastic Deformation 145 12.2.1 Numerical Method and Program of Elastic Deformation Equation in Line Contact 145 12.2.2 Numerical Method and Program of Elastic Deformation Equation in Point Contact 148 12.3 Viscosity–Pressure and Density–Pressure Equations 155 12.3.1 Viscosity–Pressure Relationship 155 12.3.2 Viscosity–Pressure–Temperature Relationship 156 12.3.3 Density–Pressure Relationship 156 13 Numerical Method and Program for EHL in Line Contact 159 13.1 Basic Equations 159 13.2 Numerical Method 160 13.2.1 Dimensionless Equations 160 13.2.2 Discrete Equations 161 13.2.3 Iterative Method 162 13.2.4 Selection of Iterative Methods 163 13.2.5 Relaxation Factors 164 13.3 Calculation Program 164 13.3.1 Calculation Diagram 164 13.3.2 Calculation Program 165 13.3.3 Calculation Results 171 14 Numerical Method and Program for EHL in Point Contact 173 14.1 Basic Equations 173 14.2 Numerical Method 174 14.2.1 Dimensionless Equations 174 14.2.2 Discrete Equations 175 14.3 Calculation Program 176 14.3.1 Calculation Diagram 176 14.3.2 Calculation Program 177 14.3.3 Calculation Results 186 15 Numerical Method and Program for Grease EHL in Line Contact 187 15.1 Basic Equations 187 15.1.1 Reynolds Equation 187 15.1.2 Film Thickness Equation 187 15.1.3 Viscosity–Pressure Equation 188 15.1.4 Density–Pressure Equation 188 15.2 Numerical Method 188 15.2.1 Dimensionless Equations 188 15.2.2 Discrete Equations 189 15.3 Calculation Program 189 15.3.1 Calculating Diagram 189 15.3.2 Calculation Program 190 15.3.3 Calculation Results 199 16 Numerical Method and Program for Grease EHL in Point Contact 201 16.1 Basic Equations 201 16.1.1 Reynolds Equation 201 16.1.2 Film Thickness Equation 201 16.1.3 Elastic Deformation Equation 202 16.1.4 Viscosity–Pressure Equation 202 16.1.5 Density Equation 202 16.2 Numerical Method 202 16.2.1 Dimensionless Equations 202 16.2.2 Discrete Equations 203 16.3 Calculation Program 204 16.3.1 Calculation Diagram 204 16.3.2 Calculation Program 205 16.3.3 Calculation Results 214 17 Numerical Method and Program for Thermal EHL in Line Contact 215 17.1 Basic Equations 215 17.1.1 Reynolds Equation 215 17.1.2 Energy Equation 215 17.1.3 Film Thickness Equation 216 17.1.4 Elastic Deformation Equation 216 17.1.5 Roelands Viscosity–Pressure–Temperature Equation 216 17.1.6 Density–Pressure–Temperature Equation 217 17.2 Numerical Method 217 17.2.1 Dimensionless Equations 217 17.2.2 Discrete Equations 218 17.3 Calculation Program 220 17.3.1 Calculation Diagram of Multigrid Method 220 17.3.2 Calculation Diagram of Temperature 221 17.3.3 Calculation Program 222 17.3.4 Calculation Results 236 18 Numerical Method and Program for Thermal EHL in Point Contact 237 18.1 Basic Equations 237 18.1.1 Reynolds Equation 237 18.1.2 Energy Equation 237 18.1.3 Film Thickness Equation 238 18.1.4 Elastic Deformation Equation 238 18.1.5 Roelands Viscosity–Pressure–Temperature Equation 239 18.1.6 Density–Pressure–Temperature Equation 239 18.2 Numerical Method 239 18.2.1 Dimensionless Equations 239 18.2.2 Discrete Equations 241 18.3 Calculation Program 242 18.3.1 Calculation Diagram 242 18.3.2 Calculation Program 242 18.3.3 Calculation Results 261 19 Numerical Method and Program for Thermal Grease EHL in Line Contact 263 19.1 Basic Equations 263 19.1.1 Reynolds Equation 263 19.1.2 Energy Equation 264 19.1.3 Film Thickness Equation 264 19.1.4 Elastic Deformation Equation 265 19.1.5 Viscosity–Pressure–Temperature Equation 265 19.1.6 Density–Pressure–Temperature Equation 265 19.2 Numerical Method 265 19.2.1 Dimensionless Equations 265 19.2.2 Discrete Equations 267 19.3 Calculation Program 268 19.3.1 Calculation Diagram 268 19.3.2 Calculation Program 268 19.3.3 Calculation Results 287 20 Numerical Method and Program for Thermal Grease EHL in Point Contact 289 20.1 Basic Equations 289 20.1.1 Reynolds Equation 289 20.1.2 Energy Equation 290 20.1.3 Film Thickness Equation 290 20.1.4 Elastic Deformation Equation 291 20.1.5 Roelands Viscosity–Pressure–Temperature Equation 291 20.1.6 Density–Pressure–Temperature Equation 291 20.2 Numerical Method 291 20.2.1 Dimensionless Equations 291 20.2.2 Discrete Equations 293 20.3 Calculation Program 294 20.3.1 Calculation Diagram 294 20.3.2 Calculation Program 295 20.3.3 Calculation Results 310 Part 4 CALCULATION PROGRAMS FOR LUBRICATION ANALYSIS IN ENGINEERING 311 21 Lubrication Calculation Program for Herringbone Grooved Journal Bearing of Micro Motor 313 21.1 Basic Theory of Lubrication Calculation of Herringbone Groove Bearing 313 21.1.1 Journal Center Position and Film Thickness 313 21.1.2 Reynolds Equation 314 21.1.3 Boundary Conditions 315 21.1.4 Flux Calculation 316 21.1.5 Temperature Calculation 316 21.2 Program for Performance Calculation 318 21.2.1 Lubrication Performances 318 21.2.2 Calculation Program 318 21.3 Calculation Results 326 21.4 Instruction for HBFA Software Package 332 21.4.1 Package Contents 332 21.4.2 Program Installation 332 21.4.3 Program Operation 333 22 Lubrication Optimization Program of Herringbone Grooved Journal Bearing of Micro Motor 337 22.1 Method of Optimization Calculation 337 22.1.1 Requirements of Parameter Optimization 337 22.1.2 Optimization Model 337 22.1.3 Optimization Methods and Steps 338 22.2 Program Layout of Optimization Calculation 338 22.2.1 Optimization Program Diagram 338 22.2.2 Calculation Program 339 22.2.3 Parameters in Program 352 22.3 Optimization Calculation Examples 352 22.3.1 Example 1: Optimization Calculation for Static Load 352 22.3.2 Example 2: Optimization Calculation for Static Flux (Eccentricity Ratio e is Constant) 354 22.3.3 Example 3: Optimization Calculation for Static Flux (Load W is Constant) 354 22.3.4 Example 4: Optimization Calculation for Dynamic Load 354 22.3.5 Example 5: Optimization Calculation for Dynamic Flux (Eccentricity e is Constant) 354 22.3.6 Example 6: Optimization Calculation for Dynamic Flux (Load W is Constant) 355 22.4 Instructions for HBOA Software Package 355 22.4.1 Program Package 355 22.4.2 Program Execution 356 23 Calculation Program for Gas Lubrication of Hard Disk/Head in Ultra Thin Film 361 23.1 Basic Equations of Gas Lubricating Film of Hard Disk/Head 361 23.1.1 Basic Equations 361 23.1.2 Gas Film Thickness 362 23.1.3 Poiseuille Flow Rate 362 23.2 Discrete Equation and Special Treatments 363 23.2.1 Iterative Scheme Considering High Bearing Numbers 363 23.2.2 Abrupt Changes between Steps on ABS 364 23.3 Calculation Program 364 23.3.1 Calculation Diagram 364 23.3.2 Calculation Program 366 23.3.3 Calculation Results 371 24 Calculation Program of Flight Attitude of Magnetic Head 373 24.1 Search Strategy for Flight Attitude 373 24.2 Calculation Program 375 24.2.1 Program Introduction 375 24.2.2 Calculation Diagram 376 24.2.3 Calculation Program 376 24.2.4 Calculation Results 386 References 389 Index 391

Read more less

Book SynopsisThere has been concerted effort across scientific disciplines to develop artificial materials and systems that can help researchers understand natural stimuli-responsive activities. With its up-to-date coverage on intelligent stimuli-responsive materials, Intelligent Stimuli-Responsive Materials provides research, industry, and academia professionals with the fundamentals and principles of intelligent stimuli-responsive materials, with a focus on methods and applications. Emphasizing nanostructures and applications for a broad range of fields, each chapter comprehensively covers a different stimuli-responsive material and discusses its developments, advances, challenges, analytical techniques, and applications.Trade Review“From this book it becomes clear that the potential of stimuli-responsive materials is enormous. It is a superb guide to the subject, and I enthusiastically recommend reading it.” (Angew. Chem. Int. Ed, 1 October 2014)Table of ContentsPreface vii Contributors ix 1 Nature-Inspired Stimuli-Responsive Self-Folding Materials 1 Leonid Ionov 2 Stimuli-Responsive Nanostructures from Self-Assembly of Rigid–Flexible Block Molecules 17 Yongju Kim, Taehoon Kim, and Myongsoo Lee 3 Stimuli-Directed Alignment Control of Semiconducting Discotic Liquid Crystalline Nanostructures 55 Hari Krishna Bisoyi and Quan Li 4 Anion-Driven Supramolecular Self-Assembled Materials 115 Hiromitsu Maeda 5 Photoresponsive Cholesteric Liquid Crystals 141 Yannian Li and Quan Li 6 Electric- and Light-Responsive Bent-Core Liquid Crystals: From Molecular Architecture and Supramolecular Nanostructures to Applications 189 Yongqiang Zhang 7 Photomechanical Liquid Crystalline Polymers:Motion in Response to Light 233 Haifeng Yu and Quan Li 8 Responsive Nanoporous Silica Colloidal Films and Membranes 265 Amir Khabibullin and Ilya Zharov 9 Stimuli-Responsive Smart Organic Hybrid Metal Nanoparticles 293 Chenming Xue and Quan Li 10 Biologically Stimuli-Responsive Hydrogels 335 Akifumi Kawamura and Takashi Miyata 11 Biomimetic Self-Oscillating Polymer Gels 363 Ryo Yoshida 12 Stimuli-Responsive Surfaces in Biomedical Applications 377 Alice Pranzetti, Jon A. Preece, and Paula M. Mendes 13 Stimuli-Responsive Conjugated Polymers: From Electronic Noses to Artificial Muscles 423 Astha Malhotra, Matthew McInnis, Jordan Anderson, and Lei Zhai Index 471

Read more less

Book SynopsisA detailed presentation of the physics of electron beam-specimen interactions Electron microscopy is one of the most widely used characterisation techniques in materials science, physics, chemistry, and the life sciences. This book examines the interactions between the electron beam and the specimen, the fundamental starting point for all electron microscopy. Detailed explanations are provided to help reinforce understanding, and new topics at the forefront of current research are presented. It provides readers with a deeper knowledge of the subject, particularly if they intend to simulate electron beam-specimen interactions as part of their research projects. The book covers the vast majority of commonly used electron microscopy techniques. Some of the more advanced topics (annular bright field and dopant atom imaging, atomic resolution chemical analysis, band gap measurements) provide additional value, especially for readers who have access to advanced instrumentatioTable of ContentsPreface ix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Organisation and Scope of the Book 3 References 8 2 The Monte Carlo Method 9 2.1 Physical Background and Implementation 11 2.1.1 Elastic Scattering By an Atomic Nucleus 11 2.1.2 Inelastic Scattering by Atomic Electrons 18 2.1.3 Implementation of the Monte Carlo Algorithm 23 2.2 Some Applications of the Monte Carlo Method 27 2.2.1 Spatial Resolution and Backscattered Imaging 27 2.2.2 Characteristic X-Ray Generation 34 2.2.3 Cathodoluminescence and Electron Beam Induced Current Microscopy 37 2.3 Further Topics in Monte Carlo Simulations 40 2.3.1 Classical or Quantum Physics? 40 2.3.2 Spin–Orbit Coupling and the Mott Cross-Section 43 2.3.3 Dielectric Model of Stopping Power and Secondary Electron Emission 46 2.4 Summary 49 References 50 3 Multislice Method 53 3.1 Mathematical Treatment of the Multislice Method 56 3.1.1 Specimen Transmission Function 59 3.1.2 Fresnel Propagator Function 66 3.1.3 Objective Lens Contrast Transfer Function and Partial Coherence 71 3.1.4 Implementation of the Multislice Algorithm 76 3.2 Applications of Multislice Simulations 78 3.2.1 HREM Imaging and Electron Crystallography 78 3.2.2 CBED and STEM Applications: Frozen Phonon Model 87 3.3 Further Topics in Multislice Simulation 93 3.3.1 Accuracy of Multislice Algorithms 93 3.3.2 Is the Frozen Phonon Model Physically Realistic? 97 3.4 Summary 102 References 102 4 Bloch Waves 105 4.1 Basic Principles 106 4.1.1 Mathematical Background 106 4.1.2 Application to Two-Beam Theory 111 4.1.3 Phenomenological Modelling of Thermal Diffuse Scattering 116 4.1.4 Bloch States in Zone-Axis Orientations 124 4.2 Applications of Bloch Wave Theory 132 4.2.1 HREM Imaging 132 4.2.2 HAADF Imaging 134 4.2.3 Bloch Wave Scattering By Elastic Strain Fields 144 4.3 Further Topics in Bloch Waves 149 4.3.1 Dopant Atom Imaging in STEM 149 4.3.2 Electron Channelling and Its Uses 156 4.4 Summary 160 References 161 5 Single Electron Inelastic Scattering 165 5.1 Fundamentals of Inelastic Scattering 166 5.1.1 Electron Excitation in a Single Atom by a Plane Wave 166 5.1.2 Mixed Dynamic Form Factor 180 5.1.3 Yoshioka Equations and Inelastic Scattering within a Crystal 189 5.1.4 Coherence in Inelastic Scattering 195 5.2 Fine Structure of The Electron Energy Loss Signal 201 5.2.1 Origin of Fine Structure 201 5.2.2 Core Hole Effects 206 5.2.3 Magnetic Circular Dichroism 209 5.3 Summary 211 References 212 6 Electrodynamic Theory of Inelastic Scattering 215 6.1 Bulk and Surface Energy Loss 216 6.1.1 Energy Loss in an ‘Infinite‘ Solid 216 6.1.2 Phonon Spectroscopy 226 6.1.3 Interface and Surface Contributions 232 6.2 Radiative Phenomena 244 6.2.1 Cerenkov Radiation and Band Gap Measurement 244 6.2.2 Transition Radiation 249 6.3 Simulating Low Energy Loss EELS Spectra 253 6.3.1 Discrete Dipole Approximation (DDA) 253 6.3.2 Boundary Element Method (BEM) 254 6.4 Summary 259 References 259 Appendix A The First Born Approximation and Atom Scattering Factor 263 Appendix B Potential for an ‘Infinite’ Perfect Crystal 267 Appendix C The Transition Matrix Element in the One Electron Approximation 269 Appendix D Bulk Energy Loss in the Retarded Regime 271 Index 275

Read more less

Book SynopsisIntroduces the theory and applications of the extended finite element method (XFEM) in the linear and nonlinear problems of continua, structures and geomechanics Explores the concept of partition of unity, various enrichment functions, and fundamentals of XFEM formulation. Covers numerous applications of XFEM including fracture mechanics, large deformation, plasticity, multiphase flow, hydraulic fracturing and contact problems Accompanied by a website hosting source code and examples Table of ContentsSeries Preface xv Preface xvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 An Enriched Finite Element Method 3 1.3 A Review on X-FEM: Development and Applications 5 1.3.1 Coupling X-FEM with the Level-Set Method 6 1.3.2 Linear Elastic Fracture Mechanics (LEFM) 7 1.3.3 Cohesive Fracture Mechanics 11 1.3.4 Composite Materials and Material Inhomogeneities 14 1.3.5 Plasticity, Damage, and Fatigue Problems 16 1.3.6 Shear Band Localization 19 1.3.7 Fluid–Structure Interaction 19 1.3.8 Fluid Flow in Fractured Porous Media 20 1.3.9 Fluid Flow and Fluid Mechanics Problems 22 1.3.10 Phase Transition and Solidification 23 1.3.11 Thermal and Thermo-Mechanical Problems 24 1.3.12 Plates and Shells 24 1.3.13 Contact Problems 26 1.3.14 Topology Optimization 28 1.3.15 Piezoelectric and Magneto-Electroelastic Problems 28 1.3.16 Multi-Scale Modeling 29 2 Extended Finite Element Formulation 31 2.1 Introduction 31 2.2 The Partition of Unity Finite Element Method 33 2.3 The Enrichment of Approximation Space 35 2.3.1 Intrinsic Enrichment 35 2.3.2 Extrinsic Enrichment 36 2.4 The Basis of X-FEM Approximation 37 2.4.1 The Signed Distance Function 39 2.4.2 The Heaviside Function 43 2.5 Blending Elements 46 2.6 Governing Equation of a Body with Discontinuity 49 2.6.1 The Divergence Theorem for Discontinuous Problems 50 2.6.2 The Weak form of Governing Equation 51 2.7 The X-FEM Discretization of Governing Equation 53 2.7.1 Numerical Implementation of X-FEM Formulation 55 2.7.2 Numerical Integration Algorithm 57 2.8 Application of X-FEM in Weak and Strong Discontinuities 60 2.8.1 Modeling an Elastic Bar with a Strong Discontinuity 61 2.8.2 Modeling an Elastic Bar with a Weak Discontinuity 63 2.8.3 Modeling an Elastic Plate with a Crack Interface at its Center 66 2.8.4 Modeling an Elastic Plate with a Material Interface at its Center 68 2.9 Higher Order X-FEM 70 2.10 Implementation of X-FEM with Higher Order Elements 73 2.10.1 Higher Order X-FEM Modeling of a Plate with a Material Interface 73 2.10.2 Higher Order X-FEM Modeling of a Plate with a Curved Crack Interface 75 3 Enrichment Elements 77 3.1 Introduction 77 3.2 Tracking Moving Boundaries 78 3.3 Level Set Method 81 3.3.1 Numerical Implementation of LSM 82 3.3.2 Coupling the LSM with X-FEM 83 3.4 Fast Marching Method 85 3.4.1 Coupling the FMM with X-FEM 87 3.5 X-FEM Enrichment Functions 88 3.5.1 Bimaterials, Voids, and Inclusions 88 3.5.2 Strong Discontinuities and Crack Interfaces 91 3.5.3 Brittle Cracks 93 3.5.4 Cohesive Cracks 97 3.5.5 Plastic Fracture Mechanics 99 3.5.6 Multiple Cracks 101 3.5.7 Fracture in Bimaterial Problems 102 3.5.8 Polycrystalline Microstructure 106 3.5.9 Dislocations 111 3.5.10 Shear Band Localization 113 4 Blending Elements 119 4.1 Introduction 119 4.2 Convergence Analysis in the X-FEM 120 4.3 Ill-Conditioning in the X-FEM Method 124 4.3.1 One-Dimensional Problem with Material Interface 126 4.4 Blending Strategies in X-FEM 128 4.5 Enhanced Strain Method 130 4.5.1 An Enhanced Strain Blending Element for the Ramp Enrichment Function 132 4.5.2 An Enhanced Strain Blending Element for Asymptotic Enrichment Functions 134 4.6 The Hierarchical Method 135 4.6.1 A Hierarchical Blending Element for Discontinuous Gradient Enrichment 135 4.6.2 A Hierarchical Blending Element for Crack Tip Asymptotic Enrichments 137 4.7 The Cutoff Function Method 138 4.7.1 The Weighted Function Blending Method 140 4.7.2 A Variant of the Cutoff Function Method 142 4.8 A DG X-FEM Method 143 4.9 Implementation of Some Optimal X-FEM Type Methods 147 4.9.1 A Plate with a Circular Hole at Its Centre 148 4.9.2 A Plate with a Horizontal Material Interface 149 4.9.3 The Fiber Reinforced Concrete in Uniaxial Tension 151 4.10 Pre-Conditioning Strategies in X-FEM 154 4.10.1 Béchet’s Pre-Conditioning Scheme 155 4.10.2 Menk–Bordas Pre-Conditioning Scheme 156 5 Large X-FEM Deformation 161 5.1 Introduction 161 5.2 Large FE Deformation 163 5.3 The Lagrangian Large X-FEM Deformation Method 167 5.3.1 The Enrichment of Displacement Field 167 5.3.2 The Large X-FEM Deformation Formulation 170 5.3.3 Numerical Integration Scheme 172 5.4 Numerical Modeling of Large X-FEM Deformations 173 5.4.1 Modeling an Axial Bar with a Weak Discontinuity 173 5.4.2 Modeling a Plate with the Material Interface 177 5.5 Application of X-FEM in Large Deformation Problems 181 5.5.1 Die-Pressing with a Horizontal Material Interface 182 5.5.2 Die-Pressing with a Rigid Central Core 186 5.5.3 Closed-Die Pressing of a Shaped-Tablet Component 188 5.6 The Extended Arbitrary Lagrangian–Eulerian FEM 192 5.6.1 ALE Formulation 192 5.6.1.1 Kinematics 193 5.6.1.2 ALE Governing Equations 194 5.6.2 The Weak Form of ALE Formulation 195 5.6.3 The ALE FE Discretization 196 5.6.4 The Uncoupled ALE Solution 198 5.6.4.1 Material (Lagrangian) Phase 199 5.6.4.2 Smoothing Phase 199 5.6.4.3 Convection (Eulerian) Phase 200 5.6.5 The X-ALE-FEM Computational Algorithm 202 5.6.5.1 Level Set Update 203 5.6.5.2 Stress Update with Sub-Triangular Numerical Integration 204 5.6.5.3 Stress Update with Sub-Quadrilateral Numerical Integration 205 5.7 Application of the X-ALE-FEM Model 208 5.7.1 The Coining Test 208 5.7.2 A Plate in Tension 209 6 Contact Friction Modeling with X-FEM 215 6.1 Introduction 215 6.2 Continuum Model of Contact Friction 216 6.2.1 Contact Conditions: The Kuhn–Tucker Rule 217 6.2.2 Plasticity Theory of Friction 218 6.2.3 Continuum Tangent Matrix of Contact Problem 221 6.3 X-FEM Modeling of the Contact Problem 223 6.3.1 The Gauss–Green Theorem for Discontinuous Problems 223 6.3.2 The Weak Form of Governing Equation for a Contact Problem 224 6.3.3 The Enrichment of Displacement Field 226 6.4 Modeling of Contact Constraints via the Penalty Method 227 6.4.1 Modeling of an Elastic Bar with a Discontinuity at Its Center 231 6.4.2 Modeling of an Elastic Plate with a Discontinuity at Its Center 233 6.5 Modeling of Contact Constraints via the Lagrange Multipliers Method 235 6.5.1 Modeling the Discontinuity in an Elastic Bar 239 6.5.2 Modeling the Discontinuity in an Elastic Plate 240 6.6 Modeling of Contact Constraints via the Augmented-Lagrange Multipliers Method 241 6.6.1 Modeling an Elastic Bar with a Discontinuity 244 6.6.2 Modeling an Elastic Plate with a Discontinuity 245 6.7 X-FEM Modeling of Large Sliding Contact Problems 246 6.7.1 Large Sliding with Horizontal Material Interfaces 249 6.8 Application of X-FEM Method in Frictional Contact Problems 251 6.8.1 An Elastic Square Plate with Horizontal Interface 251 6.8.1.1 Imposing the Unilateral Contact Constraint 252 6.8.1.2 Modeling the Frictional Stick–Slip Behavior 255 6.8.2 A Square Plate with an Inclined Crack 256 6.8.3 A Double-Clamped Beam with a Central Crack 259 6.8.4 A Rectangular Block with an S–Shaped Frictional Contact Interface 261 7 Linear Fracture Mechanics with the X-FEM Technique 267 7.1 Introduction 267 7.2 The Basis of LEFM 269 7.2.1 Energy Balance in Crack Propagation 270 7.2.2 Displacement and Stress Fields at the Crack Tip Area 271 7.2.3 The SIFs 273 7.3 Governing Equations of a Cracked Body 276 7.3.1 The Enrichment of Displacement Field 277 7.3.2 Discretization of Governing Equations 280 7.4 Mixed-Mode Crack Propagation Criteria 283 7.4.1 The Maximum Circumferential Tensile Stress Criterion 283 7.4.2 The Minimum Strain Energy Density Criterion 284 7.4.3 The Maximum Energy Release Rate 284 7.5 Crack Growth Simulation with X-FEM 285 7.5.1 Numerical Integration Scheme 287 7.5.2 Numerical Integration of Contour J–Integral 289 7.6 Application of X-FEM in Linear Fracture Mechanics 290 7.6.1 X-FEM Modeling of a DCB 290 7.6.2 An Infinite Plate with a Finite Crack in Tension 294 7.6.3 An Infinite Plate with an Inclined Crack 298 7.6.4 A Plate with Two Holes and Multiple Cracks 300 7.7 Curved Crack Modeling with X-FEM 304 7.7.1 Modeling a Curved Center Crack in an Infinite Plate 307 7.8 X-FEM Modeling of a Bimaterial Interface Crack 309 7.8.1 The Interfacial Fracture Mechanics 310 7.8.2 The Enrichment of the Displacement Field 311 7.8.3 Modeling of a Center Crack in an Infinite Bimaterial Plate 314 8 Cohesive Crack Growth with the X-FEM Technique 317 8.1 Introduction 317 8.2 Governing Equations of a Cracked Body 320 8.2.1 The Enrichment of Displacement Field 322 8.2.2 Discretization of Governing Equations 323 8.3 Cohesive Crack Growth Based on the Stress Criterion 325 8.3.1 Cohesive Constitutive Law 325 8.3.2 Crack Growth Criterion and Crack Growth Direction 326 8.3.3 Numerical Integration Scheme 328 8.4 Cohesive Crack Growth Based on the SIF Criterion 328 8.4.1 The Enrichment of Displacement Field 329 8.4.2 The Condition for Smooth Crack Closing 332 8.4.3 Crack Growth Criterion and Crack Growth Direction 332 8.5 Cohesive Crack Growth Based on the Cohesive Segments Method 334 8.5.1 The Enrichment of Displacement Field 334 8.5.2 Cohesive Constitutive Law 335 8.5.3 Crack Growth Criterion and Its Direction for Continuous Crack Propagation 336 8.5.4 Crack Growth Criterion and Its Direction for Discontinuous Crack Propagation 339 8.5.5 Numerical Integration Scheme 341 8.6 Application of X-FEM Method in Cohesive Crack Growth 341 8.6.1 A Three-Point Bending Beam with Symmetric Edge Crack 341 8.6.2 A Plate with an Edge Crack under Impact Velocity 343 8.6.3 A Three-Point Bending Beam with an Eccentric Crack 346 9 Ductile Fracture Mechanics with a Damage-Plasticity Model in X-FEM 351 9.1 Introduction 351 9.2 Large FE Deformation Formulation 353 9.3 Modified X-FEM Formulation 356 9.4 Large X-FEM Deformation Formulation 359 9.5 The Damage–Plasticity Model 364 9.6 The Nonlocal Gradient Damage Plasticity 368 9.7 Ductile Fracture with X-FEM Plasticity Model 369 9.8 Ductile Fracture with X-FEM Non-Local Damage-Plasticity Model 372 9.8.1 Crack Initiation and Crack Growth Direction 372 9.8.2 Crack Growth with a Null Step Analysis 375 9.8.3 Crack Growth with a Relaxation Phase Analysis 377 9.8.4 Locking Issues in Crack Growth Modeling 379 9.9 Application of X-FEM Damage-Plasticity Model 380 9.9.1 The Necking Problem 380 9.9.2 The CT Test 383 9.9.3 The Double-Notched Specimen 385 9.10 Dynamic Large X-FEM Deformation Formulation 387 9.10.1 The Dynamic X-FEM Discretization 388 9.10.2 The Large Strain Model 390 9.10.3 The Contact Friction Model 391 9.11 The Time Domain Discretization: The Dynamic Explicit Central Difference Method 393 9.12 Implementation of Dynamic X-FEM Damage-Plasticity Model 396 9.12.1 A Plate with an Inclined Crack 398 9.12.2 The Low Cycle Fatigue Test 400 9.12.3 The Cyclic CT Test 401 9.12.4 The Double Notched Specimen in Cyclic Loading 405 10 X-FEM Modeling of Saturated/Semi-Saturated Porous Media 409 10.1 Introduction 409 10.1.1 Governing Equations of Deformable Porous Media 411 10.2 The X-FEM Formulation of Deformable Porous Media with Weak Discontinuities 414 10.2.1 Approximation of Displacement and Pressure Fields 415 10.2.2 The X-FEM Spatial Discretization 418 10.2.3 The Time Domain Discretization and Solution Procedure 419 10.2.4 Numerical Integration Scheme 421 10.3 Application of the X-FEM Method in Deformable Porous Media with Arbitrary Interfaces 422 10.3.1 An Elastic Soil Column 422 10.3.2 An Elastic Foundation 424 10.4 Modeling Hydraulic Fracture Propagation in Deformable Porous Media 427 10.4.1 Governing Equations of a Fractured Porous Medium 428 10.4.2 The Weak Formulation of a Fractured Porous Medium 430 10.5 The X-FEM Formulation of Deformable Porous Media with Strong Discontinuities 434 10.5.1 Approximation of the Displacement and Pressure Fields 434 10.5.2 The X-FEM Spatial Discretization 437 10.5.3 The Time Domain Discretization and Solution Procedure 438 10.6 Alternative Approaches to Fluid Flow Simulation within the Fracture 442 10.6.1 A Partitioned Solution Algorithm for Interfacial Pressure 442 10.6.2 A Time-Dependent Constant Pressure Algorithm 444 10.7 Application of the X-FEM Method in Hydraulic Fracture Propagation of Saturated Porous Media 445 10.7.1 An Infinite Saturated Porous Medium with an Inclined Crack 446 10.7.2 Hydraulic Fracture Propagation in an Infinite Poroelastic Medium 449 10.7.3 Hydraulic Fracturing in a Concrete Gravity Dam 452 10.8 X-FEM Modeling of Contact Behavior in Fractured Porous Media 455 10.8.1 Contact Behavior in a Fractured Medium 455 10.8.2 X-FEM Formulation of Contact along the Fracture 456 10.8.3 Consolidation of a Porous Block with a Vertical Discontinuity 457 11 Hydraulic Fracturing in Multi-Phase Porous Media with X-FEM 461 11.1 Introduction 461 11.2 The Physical Model of Multi-Phase Porous Media 463 11.3 Governing Equations of Multi-Phase Porous Medium 465 11.4 The X-FEM Formulation of Multi-Phase Porous Media with Weak Discontinuities 467 11.4.1 Approximation of the Primary Variables 469 11.4.2 Discretization of Equilibrium and Flow Continuity Equations 473 11.4.3 Solution Procedure of Discretized Equilibrium Equations 476 11.5 Application of X-FEM Method in Multi-Phase Porous Media with Arbitrary Interfaces 477 11.6 The X-FEM Formulation for Hydraulic Fracturing in Multi-Phase Porous Media 482 11.7 Discretization of Multi-Phase Governing Equations with Strong Discontinuities 487 11.8 Solution Procedure for Fully Coupled Nonlinear Equations 493 11.9 Computational Notes in Hydraulic Fracture Modeling 497 11.10 Application of the X-FEM Method to Hydraulic Fracture Propagation of Multi-Phase Porous Media 499 12 Thermo-Hydro-Mechanical Modeling of Porous Media with X-FEM 509 12.1 Introduction 509 12.2 THM Governing Equations of Saturated Porous Media 511 12.3 Discontinuities in a THM Medium 513 12.4 The X-FEM Formulation of THM Governing Equations 514 12.4.1 Approximation of Displacement, Pressure, and Temperature Fields 515 12.4.2 The X-FEM Spatial Discretization 517 12.4.3 The Time Domain Discretization 520 12.5 Application of the X-FEM Method to THM Behavior of Porous Media 521 12.5.1 A Plate with an Inclined Crack in Thermal Loading 521 12.5.2 A Plate with an Edge Crack in Thermal Loading 522 12.5.3 An Impermeable Discontinuity in Saturated Porous Media 524 12.5.4 An Inclined Fault in Porous Media 527 References 533 Index 557

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe encyclopedia will be an invaluable source of information for researchers and students from diverse backgrounds including physics, chemistry, materials science and surface engineering, biotechnology, pharmacy, medical science, and biomedical engineering. .Table of Contents1 Room Temperature Vulcanized Silicone Rubber Coatings: Application in High Voltage Substations 3 Kiriakos Siderakis and Dionisios Pylarinos 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Pollution of High Voltage Insulators 4 1.3 Silicone Coatings for High Voltage Ceramic Insulators 5 1.4 RTV SIR Coatings Formulation 6 1.5 Hydrophobicity in RTV SIR 10 1.6 Electrical Performance of RTV SIR Coatings 13 1.7 Conclusions 13 References 13 2 Silicone Copolymers: Enzymatic Synthesis and Properties 19 Yadagiri Poojari 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 Polysiloxanes 20 2.3 Silicone Aliphatic Polyesters 20 2.4 Silicone Aliphatic Polyesteramides 21 2.5 Silicone Fluorinated Aliphatic Polyesteramides 21 2.6 Silicone Aromatic Polyesters and Polyamides 21 2.7 Silicone Polycaprolactone 22 2.8 Silicone Polyethers 23 2.9 Silicone Sugar Conjugates 24 2.10 Stereo-Selective Esterification of Organosiloxanes 24 2.11 Conclusion and Outlook 25 Acknowledgments 25 References 25 3 Phosphorus Containing Siliconized Epoxy Resins 27 S. Ananda Kumar, M. Alagar and M. Mandhakini 3.1 Introduction 27 3.2 Preparation of Siliconized Epoxy-Bismaleimide Intercrosslinked Matrices 29 3.3 Phosphorus-Containing Siliconized Epoxy Resin as Thermal and Flame Retardant Coatings 31 3.4 High Functionality Resins for the Fabrication of Nanocomposites 33 3.5 Anticorrosive and Antifouling Coating Performance of Siloxane- and Phosphorus-Modified Epoxy Composites 39 3.6 Summary and Conclusion 46 Acknowledgement 48 References 49 4 Nanostructured Silicone Materials 51 Joanna Lewandowska-Lañcucka, Mariusz Kepczynski and Maria Nowakowska 4.1 Introduction 51 4.2 Solid Particles 52 4.3 Nanocapsules 56 4.4 Ultra-Thin Silicone Films 60 4.5 Conclusion and Outlook 61 References 62 5 High Refractive Index Silicone 65 Zulkifli Ahmad 5.1 Introduction 65 5.2 Theory of RI 66 5.3 High Refractive Index Silicone 69 5.4 Applications 71 5.5 Conclusion and Outlook 74 6 Irradiation Induced Chemical and Physical Effects in Silicones 75 R. Huszank 6.1 Introduction 75 6.2 Sources of Irradiation 76 6.3 Irradiation-Induced Chemical Effects in Silicones 77 6.4 Irradiation-Induced Physical Effects in Silicones 81 6.5 Conclusion and Outlook 83 7 Developments and Properties of Reinforced Silicone Rubber Nanocomposites 85 Suneel Kumar Srivastava and Bratati Pradhan 7.1 Introduction 85 7.2 Different Types of Nanofillers Used in Silicone Rubber (SR) 86 7.3 Preparation of Silicone Rubber (SR) Nanocomposites 89 7.4 Morphology of Silicone Rubber (SR) Nanocomposites 90 7.5 Properties of Silicone Rubber Nanocomposites 94 7.6 Conclusion and Outlook 105 References 105 8 Functionalization of Silicone Rubber Surfaces towards Biomedical Applications 111 Lígia R. Rodrigues and Fernando Dourado 8.1 Introduction 111 8.2 Silicone Rubber – Material of Excellence for Biomedical Applications? 111 8.3 Surface Modification of Silicone Rubber 113 8.4 Conclusion and Outlook 119 References 120 9 Functionalization of Colloidal Silica Nanoparticles and Their Use in Paint and Coatings 123 Peter Greenwood and Anders Törncrona 9.1 Introduction to Colloidal Silica 123 9.2 Chemistry of Silica Surface Functionalization by Organosilanes 124 9.3 Characterization and Product Properties of Silane-Modified Silica Dispersions 125 9.4 Applications for Silanized Silica Nanoparticles in Paint and Coatings 130 9.5 Conclusion and Outlook 139 References 139 10 Surface Modification of PDMS in Microfluidic Devices 141 Wenjun Qiu, Chaoqun Wu and Zhigang Wu 10.1 Introduction 141 10.2 PDMS Surface Modification Techniques 142 10.3 Characterization Techniques 147 10.4 Discussion and Perspectives 148 Part 2: Characterization 151 11 The Development and Application of NMR Methodologies for the Study of Degradation in Complex Silicones 153 Robert S. Maxwell, James Lewicki, Brian P. Mayer, Amitesh Maiti and Stephen J. Harley 11.1 Introduction 153 11.2 Applications of NMR for Characterizing Silicones 155 11.3 Highlights of Recent Advances in NMR Methodology 159 11.4 Conclusions and Outlook 173 Acknowledgements 173 12 Applications of Some Spectroscopic Techniques on Silicones and Precursor to Silicones 177 Atul Tiwari 12.1 Introduction 177 12.2 Fourier Transformation Infrared and Spectroscopy of Silicones 178 12.3 Raman Spectroscopy of Silicones 181 12.4 FTIR-Assisted Chemical Component Analysis in Thermal Degradation of Silicones 182 12.5 X-ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy of Silicones 183 12.6 Secondary Ion Mass Spectroscopy 187 12.7 Conclusion and Outlook 187 Acknowledgement 187 References 188 13 Degradative Thermal Analysis of Engineering Silicones 191 James P. Lewicki and Robert S. Maxwell 13.1 Degradative Thermal Analysis of Engineering Silicones 191 13.2 Conclusions and Outlook 209 Acknowledgments 209 References 209 14 High Frequency Properties and Applications of Elastomeric Silicones 211 Charan M. Shah, Withawat Withayachumnankul, Madhu Bhaskaran and Sharath Sriram 14.1 Introduction 211 14.2 Silicone Microdevice Fabrication 212 14.3 Properties of Silicone at Radio Frequencies (1–20 GHz) 213 14.4 Properties of Silicone at Terahertz Frequencies (0.2 THz – 4.0 THz) 220 14.5 Conclusion and Outlook 223 Acknowledgements 223 References 223 15 Mathematical Modeling of Drug Delivery from Silicone Devices Used in Bovine Estrus Synchronization 225 Ignacio M. Helbling, Juan C.D. Ibarra and Julio A. Luna 15.1 Introduction 225 15.2 Bovine Estrous Cycle 226 15.3 Bovine Estrus Synchronization 228 15.4 Controlled Release Silicone Devices 230 15.5 Mathematical Modeling 232 15.6 Conclusion and Outlook 237 References 238 16 Safety and Toxicity Aspects of Polysiloxanes (Silicones) Applications 243 Krystyna Mojsiewicz-Pieñkowska 16.1 Introduction 243 16.2 Business Strategy for Manufacturing and Sale of Polysiloxanes 243 16.3 Chemical Aspects 244 16.4 Speciation Analysis 245 16.5 Application Areas and Direct Human Contact with Polysiloxanes (Silicones) 246 16.6 Toxicological Aspects 247 16.7 Conclusion and Outlook 249 References 249 17 Structure Properties Interrelations of Silicones for Optimal Design in Biomedical Prostheses 253 Petroula A. Tarantili 17.1 Introduction 253 17.2 Materials and Methods 259 17.3 Discussion of Results 260 17.4 Conclusions and Outlook 267 References 269 Part 3: Applications 273 18 Silicone-Based Soft Electronics 275 Shi Cheng 18.1 Introduction 275 18.2 Silicone-Based Passive Soft Electronics 276 18.3 Silicone-Based Integrated Active Soft Electronics 284 18.4 Conclusion 292 Acknowledgements 292 References 292 19 Silicone Hydrogels Materials for Contact Lens Applications 293 José M. González-Meijome, Javier González-Pérez, Paulo R.B. Fernandes, Daniela P. Lopes-Ferreira, Sergio Mollá and Vicente Compañ 19.1 Introduction 293 19.2 Synthesis and Development of Materials 294 19.3 Surface Properties 295 19.4 Bulk Properties 298 19.5 Biological Interactions 301 19.6 Load and Release of Products from Contact Lenses 304 19.7 Conclusions 305 Disclosure 306 References 306 20 Silicone Membranes for Gas, Vapor and Liquid Phase Separations 309 Paola Bernardo, Gabriele Clarizia, Johannes Carolus Jansen 20.1 Introduction 309 20.2 Material 309 20.3 Membrane Type and Configuration 310 20.4 Membrane Unit Operations Based on Silicones 314 20.5 Conclusions and Outlook 318 References 318 21 Polydimethyl Siloxane Elastomers in Maxillofacial Prosthetic Use 321 H. Serdar Çötert 21.1 Introduction 321 21.2 Facial Prostheses 322 21.3 Polydimethyl Siloxane Elastomers 328 21.4 Reinforcement 333 21.5 Biocompatibility and the Microbiological Features 334 21.6 Future Studies 335 Acknowledgements 335 References 335 22 Silicone Films for Fiber-Optic Chemical Sensing Guillermo Orellana, Juan López-Gejo and Bruno Pedras 22.1 Introduction 339 22.2 Silicone Chemistry and Technology Related to Optical Chemical Sensing 340 22.3 Gas Permeability and Optical Sensing 342 22.4 Optical Properties of Silicone Thin Films 345 22.5 Silicone Films for Optical Oxygen Sensing 346 22.6 Silicone Films for Optical Sensing of Other Species 349 22.7 Conclusion 350 Acknowledgements 350 References 350 23 Surface Design, Fabrication and Properties of Silicone Materials for Use in Tissue Engineering and Regenerative Medicine 355 Nisarg Tambe, Jing Cao, Kewei Xu and Julie A. Willoughby 23.1 Introduction 355 23.2 Silicone Biomaterials 357 23.3 Silicones in Tissue Engineering 359 23.4 Surface Characterization Techniques 366 23.5 Conclusion and Outlook 368 Acknowledgement 368 References 369 24 Silicones for Microfluidic Systems 371 Anna Kowalewska and Maria Nowacka 24.1 Introduction 371 24.2 Fabrication of Microfluidic Devices 372 24.3 Application of PDSM-Based Microfluidic Devices 376 24.4 Summary and Outlook 376 References 376 25 Silicone Oil in Biopharmaceutical Containers: Applications and Recent Concerns 381 Nitin Dixit and Devendra S. Kalonia 25.1 Introduction 381 25.2 Lubrication of Pharmaceutical Containers and Devices 381 25.3 Silicone Oil: A Molecular Perspective 382 25.4 Silicone Oil Coatings in Pharmaceutical Devices 383 25.5 Protein Adsorption to Hydrophobic Interfaces 386 25.6 Physical Stability of Biologics in the Presence of Silicone Oil 389 25.7 Conclusions and Outlook 392 List of Abbreviations 392 References 392 Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe topic of wettabilty is extremely important from both fundamental and applied aspects. The applications of wettability range from self-cleaning windows to micro- and nanofluidics. This book represents the cumulative wisdom of a contingent of world-class (researchers engaged in the domain of wettability. In the last few years there has been tremendous interest in the Lotus Leaf Effect and in understanding its mechanism and how to replicate this effect for myriad applications. The topics of superhydrophobicity, omniphobicity and superhydrophilicity are of much contemporary interest and these are covered in depth in this book.Table of ContentsPreface xvii Acknowledgements xxi Part 1: Fundamental Aspects 1 1 Correlation between Contact Line Pinning and Contact Angle Hysteresis on Heterogeneous Surfaces: A Review and Discussion 3 Mohammad Amin Sarshar, Wei Xu, and Chang-Hwan Choi 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Contact Line Pinning on Chemically Heterogeneous Flat Surfaces 4 1.3 Contact Line Pinning on Hydrophobic Structured Surfaces 7 1.4 Summary and Conclusion 14 2 Computational and Experimental Study of Contact Angle Hysteresis in Multiphase Systems 19 Vahid Mortazavi, Vahid Hejazi, Roshan M D'Souza, and Michael Nosonovsky 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 Origins of the CA Hysteresis 24 2.3 Modeling Wetting/Dewetting in Multiphase Systems 27 2.4 Experimental Observations 30 2.5 Numerical Modeling of CA Hysteresis 35 2.6 Conclusions 44 3 Heterogeneous Nucleation on a Completely Wettable Substrate 49 Masao Iwamatsu 3.1 Introduction 49 3.2 Interface-Displacement Model 51 3.3 Nucleation on a Completely-Wettable Flat Substrate 54 3.4 Nucleation on a Completely-Wettable Spherical Substrate 65 3.5 Conclusion 69 4 Local Wetting at Contact Line on Textured Hydrophobic Surfaces 73 Ri Li and Yanguang Shan 4.1 Introduction 73 4.2 Static Contact Angle 76 4.3 Wetting of Single Texture Element 80 4.4 Summary 85 5 Fundamental Understanding of Drops Wettability Behavior Theoretically and Experimentally 87 Hartmann E. N’guessan, Robert White, Aisha Leh, Arnab Baksi, and Rafael Tadmor 5.1 Introduction 87 5.2 Discussion 90 5.3 Conclusion 93 6 Hierarchical Structures Obtained by Breath Figures Self-Assembly and Chemical Etching and their Wetting Properties 97 Edward Bormashenko, Sagi Balter, Roman Grynyov, and Doron Aurbach 6.1 Introduction 97 6.2 Materials and Methods 98 6.3 Results and Discussion 100 6.4 Conclusions 105 7 Computational Aspects of Self-Cleaning Surface Mechanisms 109 Muhammad Osman, Raheel Rasool, and Roger A. Sauer 7.1 Introduction 109 7.2 Droplet Membrane 111 7.3 Flow Model 121 7.4 Results 126 7.5 Summary 129 8 Study of Material–Water Interactions Using the Wilhelmy Plate Method 131 Eric Tomasetti, Sylvie Derclaye, Mary-Hélène Delvaux, and Paul G. Rouxhet 8.1 Introduction 132 8.2 Upgrading Wetting Curves 133 8.3 Study of Surface-Oxidized Polyethylene 136 8.4 Study of Amphiphilic UV-Cured Coatings 143 8.5 Conclusion 151 9 On the Utility of Imaginary Contact Angles in the Characterization of Wettability of Rough Medicinal Hydrophilic Titanium 155 S. Lüers, C. Seitz, M. Laub, and H.P. Jennissen 9.1 Introduction 156 9.2 Theoretical Considerations 156 9.3 Materials and Methods 158 9.4 Results and Discussion 161 9.5 Conclusion 171 10 Determination of Surface Free Energy at the Nanoscale via Atomic Force Microscopy without Altering the Original Morphology 173 L. Mazzola and A. Galderisi 10.1 Introduction 174 10.2 Materials and Methods 175 10.3 Results and Discussion 180 10.4 Conclusion 188 Part 2: Superhydrophobic Surfaces 191 11 Assessment Criteria for Superhydrophobic Surfaces with Stochastic Roughness 193 Angela Duparré and Luisa Coriand 11.1 Introduction 193 11.2 Model and Experiments 194 11.3 Results and Discussion 197 11.4 Summary 200 12 Nanostructured Lubricated Silver Flake/Polymer Composites Exhibiting Robust Superhydrophobicity 203 Ilker S. Bayer, Luigi Martiradonna, and Athanassia Athanassiou 12.1 Introduction 204 12.2 Experimental 210 12.3 Results and Discussion 214 12.4 Conclusions 220 13 Local Wetting Modifi cation on Carnauba Wax-Coated Hierarchical Surfaces by Infrared Laser Treatment 227 Athanasios Milionis, Roberta Ruffi lli, Ilker S. Bayer, Lorenzo Dominici, Despina Fragouli, and Athanassia Athanassiou 13.1 Introduction 228 13.2 Experimental 229 13.3 Results and Discussion 231 13.4 Conclusions 238 Part 3: Wettability Modifi cation 243 14 Cold Radiofrequency Plasma Treatment Modifies Wettability and Germination Rate of Plant Seeds 245 Edward Bormashenko, Roman Grynyov, Yelena Bormashenko, and Elyashiv Drori 14.1 Introduction 245 14.2 Experimental 246 14.3 Results and Discussion 248 14.4 Conclusions 255 15 Controlling the Wettability of Acrylate Coatings with Photo-Induced Micro-Folding 259 Thomas Bahners, Lutz Prager, and Jochen S. Gutmann 15.1 Introduction 260 15.2 The Process of Photo-induced Micro-folding 264 15.3 Experimental 265 15.4 Review of Results 267 15.5 Summary 274 16 Influence of Surface Densification of Wood on its Dynamic Wettability and Surface Free Energy 279 M. Petric, A. Kutnar, L. Rautkari, K. Laine, and M. Hughes 16.1 Introduction 280 16.2 Experimental 281 16.3 Results and Discussion 284 16.4 Summary and Conclusions 294 17 Contact Angle on Two Canadian Woods: Influence of Moisture Content and Plane of Section 297 Fabio Tomczak and Bernard Riedl 17.1 Introduction 297 17.2 Materials and Experimental Procedures 300 17.3 Results and Discussion 302 17.4 Conclusions 307 18 Plasma Deposition of ZnO Thin Film on Sugar Maple: The Effect on Contact Angle 311 Fabio Tomczak, Bernard Riedl, and Pierre Blanchet 18.1 Introduction 312 18.2 Materials and Experimental Procedures 313 18.3 Results and Discussion 316 18.4 Conclusion 325 19 Effect of Relative Humidity on Contact Angle and its Hysteresis on Phospholipid DPPC Bilayer Deposited on Glass 329 Emil Chibowski, Konrad Terpilowski, and Lucyna Holysz 19.1 Introduction 330 19.2 Experimental 331 19.3 Result and Discussion 333 19.4 Conclusion 343 Part 4: Wettability and Surface Free Energy 347 20 Contact Angles and Surface Energy of Solids: Relevance and Limitations 349 Paul G. Rouxhet 20.1 Introduction 350 20.2 Thermodynamic Background 351 20.3 Determination of the Surface Energy of a Solid from Contact Angles 354 20.4 Wettability and Surface Composition of Polypropylene Modifi ed by Oxidation 364 20.5 Wettability and Surface Cleanliness of Inorganic Materials 368 20.6 Conclusion 371 21 Surface Free Energy and Wettability of Different Oil and Gas Reservoir Rocks 377 Andrei S. Zelenev and Nathan Lett 21.1 Introduction 377 21.2 Experimental 379 21.3 Results and Discussion 381 21.4 Conclusions 386 22 Influence of Surface Free Energy and Wettability on Friction Coefficient between Tire and Road Surface in Wet Conditions 389 L. Mazzola, A. Galderisi, G. Fortunato, V. Ciaravola, and M. Giustiniano 22.1 Introduction 390 22.2 Theoretical Basis of the New Model 391 22.3 Materials and Methods 398 22.4 Results and Discussion 402 22.5 Summary and Conclusions 408 Acknowledgement 409 References 409

Read more less

Book SynopsisTheoretical Aerodynamics is a user-friendly text for a full course on theoretical aerodynamics. The author systematically introduces aerofoil theory, its design features and performance aspects, beginning with the basics required, and then gradually proceeding to higher level.Trade Review"Theoretical Aerodynamics is a user-friendly text for a full course on theoretical aerodynamics.... Presented in an easy-to-read style making full use of figures and illustrations to enhance understanding, and moves well simpler to more advanced topics." (Expofairs.com, 20 June 2013) "The main objective of the book is to cover the classical theory for inviscid flow using exact solutions of the linear equations or approximations to the equations with, for example, panel methods and thin aerofoil theory. This provides a good grounding for the student in the basic properties of the fluid flow and results can be achieved by simple calculation." (The Aeronautical Journal, 2015)Table of ContentsAbout the Author xv Preface xvii 1 Basics 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Lift and Drag 1 1.3 Monoplane Aircraft 4 1.3.1 Types of Monoplane 5 1.4 Biplane 5 1.4.1 Advantages and Disadvantages 6 1.5 Triplane 6 1.5.1 Chord of a Profile 7 1.5.2 Chord of an Aerofoil 8 1.6 Aspect Ratio 9 1.7 Camber 10 1.8 Incidence 11 1.9 Aerodynamic Force 12 1.10 Scale Effect 15 1.11 Force and Moment Coefficients 17 1.12 The Boundary Layer 18 1.13 Summary 20 Exercise Problems 21 Reference 22 2 Essence of Fluid Mechanics 23 2.1 Introduction 23 2.2 Properties of Fluids 23 2.2.1 Pressure 23 2.2.2 Temperature 24 2.2.3 Density 24 2.2.4 Viscosity 25 2.2.5 Absolute Coefficient of Viscosity 25 2.2.6 Kinematic Viscosity Coefficient 27 2.2.7 Thermal Conductivity of Air 27 2.2.8 Compressibility 28 2.3 Thermodynamic Properties 28 2.3.1 Specific Heat 28 2.3.2 The Ratio of Specific Heats 29 2.4 Surface Tension 30 2.5 Analysis of Fluid Flow 31 2.5.1 Local and Material Rates of Change 32 2.5.2 Graphical Description of Fluid Motion 33 2.6 Basic and Subsidiary Laws 34 2.6.1 System and Control Volume 34 2.6.2 Integral and Differential Analysis 35 2.6.3 State Equation 35 2.7 Kinematics of Fluid Flow 35 2.7.1 Boundary Layer Thickness 37 2.7.2 Displacement Thickness 38 2.7.3 Transition Point 39 2.7.4 Separation Point 39 2.7.5 Rotational and Irrotational Motion 40 2.8 Streamlines 41 2.8.1 Relationship between Stream Function and Velocity Potential 41 2.9 Potential Flow 42 2.9.1 Two-dimensional Source and Sink 43 2.9.2 Simple Vortex 45 2.9.3 Source-Sink Pair 46 2.9.4 Doublet 46 2.10 Combination of Simple Flows 49 2.10.1 Flow Past a Half-Body 49 2.11 Flow Past a Circular Cylinder without Circulation 57 2.11.1 Flow Past a Circular Cylinder with Circulation 59 2.12 Viscous Flows 63 2.12.1 Drag of Bodies 65 2.12.2 Turbulence 70 2.12.3 Flow through Pipes 75 2.13 Compressible Flows 78 2.13.1 Perfect Gas 79 2.13.2 Velocity of Sound 80 2.13.3 Mach Number 80 2.13.4 Flow with Area Change 80 2.13.5 Normal Shock Relations 82 2.13.6 Oblique Shock Relations 83 2.13.7 Flow with Friction 84 2.13.8 Flow with Simple T0-Change 86 2.14 Summary 87 Exercise Problems 97 References 102 3 Conformal Transformation 103 3.1 Introduction 103 3.2 Basic Principles 103 3.2.1 Length Ratios between the Corresponding Elements in the Physical and Transformed Planes 106 3.2.2 Velocity Ratios between the Corresponding Elements in the Physical and Transformed Planes 106 3.2.3 Singularities 107 3.3 Complex Numbers 107 3.3.1 Differentiation of a Complex Function 110 3.4 Summary 112 Exercise Problems 113 4 Transformation of Flow Pattern 115 4.1 Introduction 115 4.2 Methods for Performing Transformation 115 4.2.1 By Analytical Means 116 4.3 Examples of Simple Transformation 119 4.4 Kutta−Joukowski Transformation 122 4.5 Transformation of Circle to Straight Line 123 4.6 Transformation of Circle to Ellipse 124 4.7 Transformation of Circle to Symmetrical Aerofoil 125 4.7.1 Thickness to Chord Ratio of Symmetrical Aerofoil 127 4.7.2 Shape of the Trailing Edge 129 4.8 Transformation of a Circle to a Cambered Aerofoil 129 4.8.1 Thickness-to-Chord Ratio of the Cambered Aerofoil 132 4.8.2 Camber 134 4.9 Transformation of Circle to Circular Arc 134 4.9.1 Camber of Circular Arc 137 4.10 Joukowski Hypothesis 137 4.10.1 The Kutta Condition Applied to Aerofoils 139 4.10.2 The Kutta Condition in Aerodynamics 140 4.11 Lift of Joukowski Aerofoil Section 141 4.12 The Velocity and Pressure Distributions on the Joukowski Aerofoil 144 4.13 The Exact Joukowski Transformation Process and Its Numerical Solution 146 4.14 The Velocity and Pressure Distribution 147 4.15 Aerofoil Characteristics 155 4.15.1 Parameters Governing the Aerodynamic Forces 157 4.16 Aerofoil Geometry 157 4.16.1 Aerofoil Nomenclature 157 4.16.2 NASA Aerofoils 161 4.16.3 Leading-Edge Radius and Chord Line 161 4.16.4 Mean Camber Line 161 4.16.5 Thickness Distribution 162 4.16.6 Trailing-Edge Angle 162 4.17 Wing Geometrical Parameters 162 4.18 Aerodynamic Force and Moment Coefficients 166 4.18.1 Moment Coefficient 169 4.19 Summary 171 Exercise Problems 180 Reference 181 5 Vortex Theory 183 5.1 Introduction 183 5.2 Vorticity Equation in Rectangular Coordinates 184 5.2.1 Vorticity Equation in Polar Coordinates 186 5.3 Circulation 188 5.4 Line (point) Vortex 192 5.5 Laws of Vortex Motion 194 5.6 Helmholtz’s Theorems 195 5.7 Vortex Theorems 196 5.7.1 Stoke’s Theorem 200 5.8 Calculation of uR, the Velocity due to Rotational Flow 204 5.9 Biot-Savart Law 207 5.9.1 A Linear Vortex of Finite Length 210 5.9.2 Semi-Infinite Vortex 211 5.9.3 Infinite Vortex 211 5.9.4 Helmholtz’s Second Vortex Theorem 216 5.9.5 Helmholtz’s Third Vortex Theorem 220 5.9.6 Helmholtz’s Fourth Vortex Theorem 220 5.10 Vortex Motion 220 5.11 Forced Vortex 223 5.12 Free Vortex 224 5.12.1 Free Spiral Vortex 226 5.13 Compound Vortex 229 5.14 Physical Meaning of Circulation 230 5.15 Rectilinear Vortices 235 5.15.1 Circular Vortex 236 5.16 Velocity Distribution 237 5.17 Size of a Circular Vortex 239 5.18 Point Rectilinear Vortex 239 5.19 Vortex Pair 240 5.20 Image of a Vortex in a Plane 241 5.21 Vortex between Parallel Plates 242 5.22 Force on a Vortex 244 5.23 Mutual action of Two Vortices 244 5.24 Energy due to a Pair of Vortices 244 5.25 Line Vortex 247 5.26 Summary 248 Exercise Problems 254 References 256 6 Thin Aerofoil Theory 257 6.1 Introduction 257 6.2 General Thin Aerofoil Theory 258 6.3 Solution of the General Equation 261 6.3.1 Thin Symmetrical Flat Plate Aerofoil 262 6.3.2 The Aerodynamic Coefficients for a Flat Plate 265 6.4 The Circular Arc Aerofoil 269 6.4.1 Lift, Pitching Moment, and the Center of Pressure Location for Circular Arc Aerofoil 271 6.5 The General Thin Aerofoil Section 275 6.6 Lift, Pitching Moment and Center of Pressure Coefficients for a Thin Aerofoil 278 6.7 Flapped Aerofoil 283 6.7.1 Hinge Moment Coefficient 286 6.7.2 Jet Flap 288 6.7.3 Effect of Operating a Flap 288 6.8 Summary 289 Exercise Problems 294 References 295 7 Panel Method 297 7.1 Introduction 297 7.2 Source Panel Method 297 7.2.1 Coefficient of Pressure 300 7.3 The Vortex Panel Method 302 7.3.1 Application of Vortex Panel Method 302 7.4 Pressure Distribution around a Circular Cylinder by Source Panel Method 305 7.5 Using Panel Methods 309 7.5.1 Limitations of Panel Method 309 7.5.2 Advanced Panel Methods 309 7.6 Summary 329 Exercise Problems 330 Reference 330 8 Finite Aerofoil Theory 331 8.1 Introduction 331 8.2 Relationship between Spanwise Loading and Trailing Vorticity 331 8.3 Downwash 332 8.4 Characteristics of a Simple Symmetrical Loading – Elliptic Distribution 335 8.4.1 Lift for an Elliptic Distribution 336 8.4.2 Downwash for an Elliptic Distribution 336 8.4.3 Drag Dv due to Downwash for Elliptical Distribution 338 8.5 Aerofoil Characteristic with a More General Distribution 339 8.5.1 The Downwash for Modified Elliptic Loading 341 8.6 The Vortex Drag for Modified Loading 343 8.6.1 Condition for Vortex Drag Minimum 345 8.7 Lancaster – Prandtl Lifting Line Theory 347 8.7.1 The Lift 349 8.7.2 Induced Drag 350 8.8 Effect of Downwash on Incidence 353 8.9 The Integral Equation for the Circulation 355 8.10 Elliptic Loading 356 8.10.1 Lift and Drag for Elliptical Loading 357 8.10.2 Lift Curve Slope for Elliptical Loading 359 8.10.3 Change of Aspect Ratio with Incidence 359 8.10.4 Problem II 360 8.10.5 The Lift for Elliptic Loading 363 8.10.6 The Downwash Velocity for Elliptic Loading 366 8.10.7 The Induced Drag for Elliptic Loading 366 8.10.8 Induced Drag Minimum 369 8.10.9 Lift and Drag Calculation by Impulse Method 370 8.10.10 The Rectangular Aerofoil 371 8.10.11 Cylindrical Rectangular Aerofoil 372 8.11 Aerodynamic Characteristics of Asymmetric Loading 372 8.11.1 Lift on the Aerofoil 372 8.11.2 Downwash 372 8.11.3 Vortex Drag 373 8.11.4 Rolling Moment 374 8.11.5 Yawing Moment 376 8.12 Lifting Surface Theory 378 8.12.1 Velocity Induced by a Lifting Line Element 378 8.12.2 Munk’s Theorem of Stagger 381 8.12.3 The Induced Lift 382 8.12.4 Blenk’s Method 383 8.12.5 Rectangular Aerofoil 384 8.12.6 Calculation of the Downwash Velocity 385 8.13 Aerofoils of Small Aspect Ratio 387 8.13.1 The Integral Equation 388 8.13.2 Zero Aspect Ratio 390 8.13.3 The Acceleration Potential 390 8.14 Lifting Surface 391 8.15 Summary 394 Exercise Problems 401 9 Compressible Flows 405 9.1 Introduction 405 9.2 Thermodynamics of Compressible Flows 405 9.3 Isentropic Flow 409 9.4 Discharge from a Reservoir 411 9.5 Compressible Flow Equations 413 9.6 Crocco’s Theorem 414 9.6.1 Basic Solutions of Laplace’s Equation 418 9.7 The General Potential Equation for Three-Dimensional Flow 418 9.8 Linearization of the Potential Equation 420 9.8.1 Small Perturbation Theory 420 9.9 Potential Equation for Bodies of Revolution 423 9.9.1 Solution of Nonlinear Potential Equation 425 9.10 Boundary Conditions 425 9.10.1 Bodies of Revolution 427 9.11 Pressure Coefficient 428 9.11.1 Bodies of Revolution 429 9.12 Similarity Rule 429 9.13 Two-Dimensional Flow: Prandtl-Glauert Rule for Subsonic Flow 429 9.13.1 The Prandtl-Glauert Transformations 429 9.13.2 The Direct Problem-Version I 431 9.13.3 The Indirect Problem (Case of Equal Potentials): P-G Transformation – Version II 434 9.13.4 The Streamline Analogy (Version III): Gothert’s Rule 435 9.14 Prandtl-Glauert Rule for Supersonic Flow: Versions I and II 436 9.14.1 Subsonic Flow 436 9.14.2 Supersonic Flow 436 9.15 The von Karman Rule for Transonic Flow 439 9.15.1 Use of Karman Rule 440 9.16 Hypersonic Similarity 442 9.17 Three-Dimensional Flow: The Gothert Rule 444 9.17.1 The General Similarity Rule 444 9.17.2 Gothert Rule 446 9.17.3 Application to Wings of Finite Span 447 9.17.4 Application to Bodies of Revolution and Fuselage 448 9.17.5 The Prandtl-Glauert Rule 450 9.17.6 The von Karman Rule for Transonic Flow 454 9.18 Moving Disturbance 455 9.18.1 Small Disturbance 456 9.18.2 Finite Disturbance 457 9.19 Normal Shock Waves 457 9.19.1 Equations of Motion for a Normal Shock Wave 457 9.19.2 The Normal Shock Relations for a Perfect Gas 458 9.20 Change of Total Pressure across a Shock 462 9.21 Oblique Shock and Expansion Waves 463 9.21.1 Oblique Shock Relations 464 9.21.2 Relation between β and θ 466 9.21.3 Supersonic Flow over a Wedge 469 9.21.4 Weak Oblique Shocks 471 9.21.5 Supersonic Compression 473 9.21.6 Supersonic Expansion by Turning 475 9.21.7 The Prandtl-Meyer Function 477 9.21.8 Shock-Expansion Theory 477 9.22 Thin Aerofoil Theory 479 9.22.1 Application of Thin Aerofoil Theory 480 9.23 Two-Dimensional Compressible Flows 485 9.24 General Linear Solution for Supersonic Flow 486 9.24.1 Existence of Characteristics in a Physical Problem 488 9.24.2 Equation for the Streamlines from Kinematic Flow Condition 489 9.25 Flow over a Wave-Shaped Wall 491 9.25.1 Incompressible Flow 491 9.25.2 Compressible Subsonic Flow 492 9.25.3 Supersonic Flow 493 9.25.4 Pressure Coefficient 494 9.26 Summary 495 Exercise Problems 509 References 512 10 Simple Flights 513 10.1 Introduction 513 10.2 Linear Flight 513 10.3 Stalling 514 10.4 Gliding 516 10.5 Straight Horizontal Flight 518 10.6 Sudden Increase of Incidence 520 10.7 Straight Side-Slip 521 10.8 Banked Turn 522 10.9 Phugoid Motion 523 10.10 The Phugoid Oscillation 525 10.11 Summary 529 Exercise Problems 531 Further Readings 533 Index 535

Read more less

Book SynopsisA concise introductory course text on continuum mechanics Fundamentals of Continuum Mechanics focuses on the fundamentals of the subject and provides the background for formulation of numerical methods for large deformations and a wide range of material behaviours.Trade Review“Motivated students will benefit from this systematic, disciplined and concise treatment of the fundamentals of continuum mechanics. Many practitioners will also appreciate the logical organization, and the lucid descriptions of such matters as the distinctions between the various common stress and strain measures.” (Pure and Applied Geophysics, 1 November 2015) Table of ContentsPreface xiii Nomenclature xv Introduction 1 Part One Mathematical Preliminaries 3 1 Vectors 5 1.1 Examples 9 1.1.1 9 1.1.2 9 Exercises 9 Reference 11 2 Tensors 13 2.1 Inverse 15 2.2 Orthogonal Tensor 16 2.3 Principal Values 16 2.4 Nth-Order Tensors 18 2.5 Examples 18 2.5.1 18 2.5.2 18 Exercises 19 3 Cartesian Coordinates 21 3.1 Base Vectors 21 3.2 Summation Convention 23 3.3 Tensor Components 24 3.4 Dyads 25 3.5 Tensor and Scalar Products 27 3.6 Examples 29 3.6.1 29 3.6.2 29 3.6.3 29 Exercises 30 Reference 30 4 Vector (Cross) Product 31 4.1 Properties of the Cross Product 32 4.2 Triple Scalar Product 33 4.3 Triple Vector Product 33 4.4 Applications of the Cross Product 34 4.4.1 Velocity due to Rigid Body Rotation 34 4.4.2 Moment of a Force P about O 35 4.5 Non-orthonormal Basis 36 4.6 Example 37 Exercises 37 5 Determinants 41 5.1 Cofactor 42 5.2 Inverse 43 5.3 Example 44 Exercises 44 6 Change of Orthonormal Basis 47 6.1 Change of Vector Components 48 6.2 Definition of a Vector 50 6.3 Change of Tensor Components 50 6.4 Isotropic Tensors 51 6.5 Example 52 Exercises 53 Reference 56 7 Principal Values and Principal Directions 57 7.1 Example 59 Exercises 60 8 Gradient 63 8.1 Example: Cylindrical Coordinates 66 Exercises 67 Part Two Stress 69 9 Traction and Stress Tensor 71 9.1 Types of Forces 71 9.2 Traction on Different Surfaces 73 9.3 Traction on an Arbitrary Plane (Cauchy Tetrahedron) 75 9.4 Symmetry of the Stress Tensor 76 Exercise 77 Reference 77 10 Principal Values of Stress 79 10.1 Deviatoric Stress 80 10.2 Example 81 Exercises 82 11 Stationary Values of Shear Traction 83 11.1 Example: Mohr–Coulomb Failure Condition 86 Exercises 88 12 Mohr’s Circle 89 Exercises 93 Reference 93 Part Three Motion and Deformation 95 13 Current and Reference Configurations 97 13.1 Example 102 Exercises 103 14 Rate of Deformation 105 14.1 Velocity Gradients 105 14.2 Meaning of D 106 14.3 Meaning of W 108 Exercises 109 15 Geometric Measures of Deformation 111 15.1 Deformation Gradient 111 15.2 Change in Length of Lines 112 15.3 Change in Angles 113 15.4 Change in Area 114 15.5 Change in Volume 115 15.6 Polar Decomposition 116 15.7 Example 118 Exercises 118 References 120 16 Strain Tensors 121 16.1 Material Strain Tensors 121 16.2 Spatial Strain Measures 123 16.3 Relations Between D and Rates of EG and U 124 16.3.1 Relation Between Ė and D 124 16.3.2 Relation Between D and U 125 Exercises 126 References 128 17 Linearized Displacement Gradients 129 17.1 Linearized Geometric Measures 130 17.1.1 Stretch in Direction N 130 17.1.2 Angle Change 131 17.1.3 Volume Change 131 17.2 Linearized Polar Decomposition 132 17.3 Small-Strain Compatibility 133 Exercises 135 Reference 135 Part Four Balance of Mass, Momentum, and Energy 137 18 Transformation of Integrals 139 Exercises 142 References 143 19 Conservation of Mass 145 19.1 Reynolds’ Transport Theorem 148 19.2 Derivative of an Integral over a Time-Dependent Region 149 19.3 Example: Mass Conservation for a Mixture 150 Exercises 151 20 Conservation of Momentum 153 20.1 Momentum Balance in the Current State 153 20.1.1 Linear Momentum 153 20.1.2 Angular Momentum 154 20.2 Momentum Balance in the Reference State 155 20.2.1 Linear Momentum 156 20.2.2 Angular Momentum 157 20.3 Momentum Balance for a Mixture 158 Exercises 159 21 Conservation of Energy 161 21.1 Work-Conjugate Stresses 163 Exercises 165 Part Five Ideal Constitutive Relations 167 22 Fluids 169 22.1 Ideal Frictionless Fluid 169 22.2 Linearly Viscous Fluid 171 22.2.1 Non-steady Flow 173 Exercises 175 Reference 176 23 Elasticity 177 23.1 Nonlinear Elasticity 177 23.1.1 Cauchy Elasticity 177 23.1.2 Green Elasticity 178 23.1.3 Elasticity of Pre-stressed Bodies 179 23.2 Linearized Elasticity 182 23.2.1 Material Symmetry 183 23.2.2 Linear Isotropic Elastic Constitutive Relation 185 23.2.3 Restrictions on Elastic Constants 186 23.3 More Linearized Elasticity 187 23.3.1 Uniqueness of the Static Problem 188 23.3.2 Pressurized Hollow Sphere 189 Exercises 191 Reference 194 Index 195

Read more less

Book SynopsisWritten by an internationally recognized authority, Active and Passive Vibration Damping summarizes and presents in one volume the application of viscoelastic damping materials to control vibration and noise of structures, machinery, and vehicles.Table of ContentsPreface xvii List of Symbols xxi Abbreviations xxxi Part I Fundamentals of Viscoelastic Damping 1 1 Vibration Damping 3 1.1 Overview 3 1.2 Passive, Active, and Hybrid Vibration Control 3 1.2.1 Passive Damping 3 1.2.1.1 Free and Constrained Damping Layers 3 1.2.1.2 Shunted Piezoelectric Treatments 4 1.2.1.3 Damping Layers with Shunted Piezoelectric Treatments 5 1.2.1.4 Magnetic Constrained Layer Damping (MCLD) 5 1.2.1.5 Damping with Shape Memory Fibers 6 1.2.2 Active Damping 6 1.2.3 Hybrid Damping 7 1.2.3.1 Active Constrained Layer Damping (ACLD) 7 1.2.3.2 Active Piezoelectric Damping Composites (APDC) 7 1.2.3.3 Electromagnetic Damping Composites (EMDC) 8 1.2.3.4 Active Shunted Piezoelectric Networks 8 1.3 Summary 9 References 9 2 Viscoelastic Damping 11 2.1 Introduction 11 2.2 Classical Models of Viscoelastic Materials 11 2.2.1 Characteristics in the Time Domain 11 2.2.2 Basics for Time Domain Analysis 12 2.2.3 Detailed Time Response of Maxwell and Kelvin–Voigt Models 14 2.2.4 Detailed Time Response of the Poynting–Thomson Model 17 2.3 Creep Compliance and Relaxation Modulus 20 2.3.1 Direct Laplace Transformation Approach 22 2.3.2 Approach of Simultaneous Solution of a Linear Set of Equilibrium, Kinematic, and Constitutive Equations 23 2.4 Characteristics of the VEM in the Frequency Domain 25 2.5 Hysteresis and Energy Dissipation Characteristics of Viscoelastic Materials 27 2.5.1 Hysteresis Characteristics 27 2.5.2 Energy Dissipation 28 2.5.3 Loss Factor 28 2.5.3.1 Relationship between Dissipation and Stored Elastic Energies 28 2.5.3.2 Relationship between Different Strains 29 2.5.4 Storage Modulus 29 2.6 Fractional Derivative Models of Viscoelastic Materials 32 2.6.1 Basic Building Block of Fractional Derivative Models 32 2.6.2 Basic Fractional Derivative Models 33 2.6.3 Other Common Fractional Derivative Models 36 2.7 Viscoelastic versus Other Types of Damping Mechanisms 38 2.8 Summary 40 References 40 3 Characterization of the Properties of Viscoelastic Materials 57 3.1 Introduction 57 3.2 Typical Behavior of Viscoelastic Materials 57 3.3 Frequency Domain Measurement Techniques of the Dynamic Properties of Viscoelastic Material 59 3.3.1 Dynamic, Mechanical, and Thermal Analyzer 60 3.3.2 Oberst Test Beam Method 64 3.3.2.1 Set-Up and Beam Configurations 64 3.3.2.2 Parameter Extraction 66 3.4 Master Curves of Viscoelastic Materials 68 3.4.1 The Principle of Temperature-Frequency Superposition 68 3.4.2 The Use of the Master Curves 71 3.4.3 The Constant Temperature Lines 71 3.5 Time-Domain Measurement Techniques of the Dynamic Properties of Viscoelastic Materials 72 3.5.1 Creep and Relaxation Measurement Methods 73 3.5.1.1 Testing Equipment 73 3.5.1.2 Typical Creep and Relaxation Behavior 74 3.5.1.3 Time-Temperature Superposition 76 3.5.1.4 Boltzmann Superposition Principle 78 3.5.1.5 Relationship between the Relaxation Modulus and Complex Modulus 80 3.5.1.6 Relationship between the Creep Compliance and Complex Compliance 81 3.5.1.7 Relationship between the Creep Compliance and Relaxation Modulus 83 3.5.1.8 Alternative Relationship between the Creep Compliance and Complex Compliance 83 3.5.1.9 Alternative Relationship between the Relaxation Modulus and Complex Modulus 84 3.5.1.10 Summary of the Basic Interconversion Relationship 85 3.5.1.11 Practical Issues in Implementation of Interconversion Relationships 86 3.5.2 Split Hopkinson Pressure Bar Method 94 3.5.2.1 Overview 94 3.5.2.2 Theory of 1D SHPB 95 3.5.2.3 Complex Modulus of a VEM from SHPB Measurements 98 3.5.3 Wave Propagation Method 105 3.5.4 Ultrasonic Wave Propagation Method 109 3.5.4.1 Overview 109 3.5.4.2 Theory 109 3.5.4.3 Measurement of the Phase Velocity and Attenuation Factor 111 3.5.4.4 Typical Attenuation Factors 113 3.6 Summary 115 References 116 4 Viscoelastic Materials 127 4.1 Introduction 127 4.2 Golla–Hughes–McTavish (GHM) Model 127 4.2.1 Motivation of the GHM Model 128 4.2.2 Computation of the Parameters of the GHM Mini-Oscillators 132 4.2.3 On the Structure of the GHM Model 135 4.2.3.1 Other Forms of GHM Structures 135 4.2.3.2 Relaxation Modulus of the GHM Model 135 4.2.4 Structural Finite Element Models of Rods Treated with VEM 137 4.2.4.1 Unconstrained Layer Damping 138 4.2.4.2 Constrained Layer Damping 142 4.3 Structural Finite Element Models of Beams Treated with VEM 150 4.3.1 Degrees of Freedom 150 4.3.2 Basic Kinematic Relationships 151 4.3.3 Stiffness and Mass Matrices of the Beam/VEM Element 152 4.3.4 Equations of Motion of the Beam/VEM Element 153 4.4 Generalized Maxwell Model (GMM) 155 4.4.1 Overview 155 4.4.2 Internal Variable Representation of the GMM 157 4.4.2.1 Single-DOF System 157 4.4.2.2 Multi-Degree of Freedom System 158 4.4.2.3 Condensation of the Internal Degrees of Freedom 159 4.4.2.4 Direct Solution of Coupled Structural and Internal Degrees of Freedom 160 4.5 Augmenting Thermodynamic Field (ATF) Model 163 4.5.1 Overview 163 4.5.2 Equivalent Damping Ratio of the ATF Model 164 4.5.3 Multi-degree of Freedom ATF Model 165 4.5.4 Integration with a Finite Element Model 165 4.6 Fractional Derivative (FD) Models 167 4.6.1 Overview 167 4.6.2 Internal Degrees of Freedom of Fractional Derivative Models 169 4.6.3 Grunwald Approximation of Fractional Derivative 169 4.6.4 Integration Fractional Derivative Approximation with Finite Element 170 4.6.4.1 Viscoelastic Rod 170 4.6.4.2 Beam with Passive Constrained Layer Damping (PCLD) Treatment 172 4.7 Finite Element Modeling of Plates Treated with Passive Constrained Layer Damping 176 4.7.1 Overview 176 4.7.2 The Stress and Strain Characteristics 178 4.7.2.1 The Plate and the Constraining Layers 178 4.7.2.2 The VEM Layer 179 4.7.3 The Potential and Kinetic Energies 179 4.7.4 The Shape Functions 179 4.7.5 The Stiffness Matrices 181 4.7.6 The Mass Matrices 181 4.7.7 The Element and Overall Equations of Motion 182 4.8 Finite Element Modeling of Shells Treated with Passive Constrained Layer Damping 185 4.8.1 Overview 185 4.8.2 Stress–Strain Relationships 186 4.8.2.1 Shell and Constraining Layer 186 4.8.2.2 Viscoelastic Layer 187 4.8.3 Kinetic and Potential Energies 189 4.8.4 The Shape Functions 189 4.8.5 The Stiffness Matrices 189 4.8.6 The Mass Matrices 190 4.8.7 The Element and Overall Equations of Motion 191 4.9 Summary 192 References 196 5 Finite Element Modeling of Viscoelastic Damping by Modal Strain Energy Method 205 5.1 Introduction 205 5.2 Modal Strain Energy (MSE) Method 205 5.3 Modified Modal Strain Energy (MSE) Methods 210 5.3.1 Weighted Stiffness Matrix Method (WSM) 210 5.3.2 Weighted Storage Modulus Method (WSTM) 211 5.3.3 Improved Reduction System Method (IRS) 211 5.3.4 Low Frequency Approximation Method (LFA) 213 5.4 Summary of Modal Strain Energy Methods 215 5.5 Modal Strain Energy as a Metric for Design of Damping Treatments 215 5.6 Perforated Damping Treatments 220 5.6.1 Overview 220 5.6.2 Finite Element Modeling 222 5.6.2.1 Element Energies 224 5.6.2.2 Topology Optimization of Unconstrained Layer Damping 227 5.6.2.3 Sensitivity Analysis 228 5.7 Summary 234 References 234 6 Energy Dissipation in Damping Treatments 243 6.1 Introduction 243 6.2 Passive Damping Treatments of Rods 243 6.2.1 Passive Constrained Layer Damping 243 6.2.1.1 Equation of Motion 243 6.2.1.2 Energy Dissipation 247 6.2.2 Passive Unconstrained Layer Damping 248 6.3 Active Constrained Layer Damping Treatments of Rods 251 6.3.1 Equation of Motion 251 6.3.2 Boundary Control Strategy 253 6.3.3 Energy Dissipation 254 6.4 Passive Constrained Layer Damping Treatments of Beams 257 6.4.1 Basic Equations of Damped Beams 257 6.4.2 Bending Energy of Beams 258 6.4.3 Energy Dissipated in Beams with Passive Constrained Layer Damping 258 6.5 Active Constrained Layer Damping Treatments of Beams 264 6.6 Passive and Active Constrained Layer Damping Treatments of Plates 267 6.6.1 Kinematic Relationships 268 6.6.2 Energies of the PCLD and ACLD Treatments 269 6.6.2.1 The Potential Energies 269 6.6.2.2 The Kinetic Energy 269 6.6.2.3 Work Done 269 6.6.3 The Models of the PCLD and ACLD Treatments 270 6.6.4 Boundary Control of Plates with ACLD Treatments 270 6.6.5 Energy Dissipation and Loss Factors of Plates with PCLD and ACLD Treatments 271 6.7 Passive and Active Constrained Layer Damping Treatments of Axi-Symmetric Shells 274 6.7.1 Background 275 6.7.2 The Concept of the Active Constrained Layer Damping 276 6.7.3 Variational Modeling of the Shell/ACLD System 276 6.7.3.1 Main Assumptions of the Model 276 6.7.3.2 Kinematic Relationships 276 6.7.3.3 Stress-Strain Relationships 277 6.7.3.4 Energies of Shell/ACLD System 279 6.7.3.5 The Model 280 6.7.4 Boundary Control Strategy 282 6.7.4.1 Overview 282 6.7.4.2 Control Strategy 282 6.7.4.3 Implementation of the Boundary Control Strategy 283 6.7.4.4 Transverse Compliance and Longitudinal Deflection 283 6.7.5 Energy Dissipated in the ACLD Treatment of an Axi-Symmetric Shell 287 6.8 Summary 288 References 290 Part II Advanced Damping Treatments 301 7 Vibration Damping of Structures Using Active Constrained Layer Damping 303 7.1 Introduction 303 7.2 Motivation for Using Passive and Active Constrained Layer Damping 303 7.2.1 Base Structure 304 7.2.2 Structure Treated with Unconstrained Passive Layer Damping 306 7.2.3 Structure Treated with Constrained Passive Layer Damping 308 7.2.4 Structure Treated with Active Constrained Passive Layer Damping 311 7.3 Active Constrained Layer Damping for Beams 316 7.3.1 Introduction 316 7.3.2 Concept of Active Constrained Layer Damping 316 7.3.3 Finite Element Modeling of a Beam/ACLD Assembly 318 7.3.3.1 The Model 319 7.3.3.2 Equations of Motion 322 7.3.4 Distributed-Parameter Modeling of a Beam/ACLD Assembly 328 7.3.4.1 Overview 328 7.3.4.2 The Energies and Work Done on the Beam/ACLD Assembly 328 7.3.4.3 The Distributed-Parameter Model 331 7.3.4.4 Globally Stable Boundary Control Strategy 333 7.3.4.5 Implementation of the Globally Stable Boundary Control Strategy 333 7.3.4.6 Response of the Beam/ACLD Assembly 334 7.4 Active Constrained Layer Damping for Plates 336 7.4.1 Control Forces and Moments Generated by the Active Constraining Layer 337 7.4.1.1 The In-Plane Piezoelectric Forces 337 7.4.1.2 The Piezoelectric Moments 338 7.4.1.3 Piezoelectric Sensor 338 7.4.1.4 Control Voltage to Piezoelectric Constraining Layer 339 7.4.2 Equations of Motion 339 7.5 Active Constrained Layer Damping for Shells 344 7.5.1 Control Forces and Moments Generated by the Active Constraining Layer 344 7.5.2 Equations of Motion 344 7.6 Summary 348 References 351 8 Advanced Damping Treatments 361 8.1 Introduction 361 8.2 Stand-Off Damping Treatments 362 8.2.1 Background of Stand-Off Damping Treatments 362 8.2.2 The Stand-Off Damping Treatments 362 8.2.3 Distributed-Parameter Model of the Stand-Off Layer Damping Treatment 364 8.2.3.1 Kinematic Equations 364 8.2.3.2 Constitutive Equations 365 8.2.4 Distributed Transfer Function Method 369 8.2.5 Finite Element Model 370 8.2.6 Summary 375 8.3 Functionally Graded Damping Treatments 375 8.3.1 Background of Functionally Graded Constrained Layer Damping 375 8.3.2 Concept of Constrained Layer Damping with Functionally Graded Viscoelastic Cores 376 8.3.3 Finite Element Model 377 8.3.3.1 Quasi-Static Model of the Passive Constrained Damping Layer of Plunkett and Lee (1970) 377 8.3.3.2 Dispersion Characteristics of Passive Constrained Damping Layer with Uniform and Functionally Graded Cores 383 8.3.4 Summary 390 8.4 Passive and Active Damping Composite Treatments 390 8.4.1 Passive Composite Damping Treatments 390 8.4.2 Active Composite Damping Treatments 394 8.4.3 Finite Element Modeling of Beam with APDC 396 8.4.3.1 Model and Main Assumptions 396 8.4.3.2 Kinematics 397 8.4.3.3 Degrees of Freedom and Shape Functions 398 8.4.3.4 System Energies 398 8.4.3.5 Equations of Motion 400 8.4.3.6 Control Law 400 8.4.4 Summary 408 8.5 Magnetic Damping Treatments 410 8.5.1 Magnetic Constrained Layer Damping Treatments 410 8.5.2 Analysis of Magnetic Constrained Layer Damping Treatments 412 8.5.2.1 Equation of Motion 412 8.5.2.2 Response of the MCLD Treatment 414 8.5.3 Passive Magnetic Composites 415 8.5.3.1 Concept of Passive Magnetic Composite Treatment 417 8.5.3.2 Finite Element Modeling of Beams with PMC Treatment 417 8.5.4 Summary 430 8.6 Negative Stiffness Composites 430 8.6.1 Motivation to Negative Stiffness Composites 431 8.6.1.1 Sinusoidal Excitation 431 8.6.1.2 Impact Loading 436 8.6.1.3 Magnetic Composite with Negative Stiffness Inclusions 438 8.7 Summary 445 References 445 9 Vibration Damping with Shunted Piezoelectric Networks 469 9.1 Introduction 469 9.2 Shunted Piezoelectric Patches 469 9.2.1 Basics of Piezoelectricity 469 9.2.1.1 Effect of Electrical Boundary Conditions 471 9.2.1.2 Effect of Mechanical Boundary Conditions 471 9.2.2 Basics of Shunted Piezo-Networks 472 9.2.2.1 Resistive-Shunted Circuit 474 9.2.2.2 Resistive and Inductive Shunted Circuit 475 9.2.2.3 Resistive, Capacitive, and Inductive Shunted Circuit 477 9.2.3 Electronic Synthesis of Inductances and Negative Capacitances 479 9.2.3.1 Synthesis of Inductors 479 9.2.3.2 Synthesis of Negative Capacitances 480 9.2.4 Why Negative Capacitance Is Effective? 480 9.2.5 Effectiveness of the Negative Capacitance from a Control System Perspective 482 9.2.6 Electrical Analogy of Shunted Piezoelectric Networks 485 9.3 Finite Element Modeling of Structures Treated with Shunted Piezo-Networks 487 9.3.1 Equivalent Complex Modulus Approach of Shunted Piezo-Networks 487 9.3.2 Coupled Electromechanical Field Approach of Shunted Piezo-Networks 491 9.4 Active Shunted Piezoelectric Networks 496 9.4.1 Basic Configurations 496 9.4.2 Dynamic Equations 498 9.4.2.1 Short-Circuit Configuration 498 9.4.2.2 Open-Circuit Configuration 498 9.4.2.3 Resistive-Shunted Configuration 498 9.4.3 More on the Resistive Shunting Configuration 498 9.4.4 Open-Circuit to Resistive Shunting (OC-RS) Configuration 500 9.4.4.1 Dynamic Equations 500 9.4.4.2 Switching Between OC and RS Modes 500 9.4.5 Energy Dissipation of Different Shunting Configurations 503 9.4.5.1 Energy Dissipation with Resistive Shunting 503 9.4.5.2 Energy Dissipation with OC-RS Switched Shunting 503 9.5 Multi-Mode Vibration Control with Shunted Piezoelectric Networks 504 9.5.1 Multi-Mode Shunting Approaches 504 9.5.2 Parameters of Behrens et al.’s Multi-Mode Shunting Network 507 9.5.2.1 Components of the Current Flowing Branches 507 9.5.2.2 Components of the Shunting Branches 507 9.6 Summary 510 References 511 10 Vibration Control with Periodic Structures 523 10.1 Introduction 523 10.2 Basics of Periodic Structures 524 10.2.1 Overview 524 10.2.2 Transfer Matrix Method 525 10.2.2.1 The Transfer Matrix 525 10.2.2.2 Basic Properties of the Transfer Matrix 526 10.3 Filtering Characteristics of Passive Periodic Structures 533 10.3.1 Overview 533 10.3.2 Periodic Rods in Longitudinal Vibrations 534 10.4 Natural Frequencies, Mode Shapes, and Response of Periodic Structures 535 10.4.1 Natural Frequencies and Response 535 10.4.2 Mode Shapes 539 10.5 Active Periodic Structures 541 10.5.1 Modeling of Active Periodic Structures 543 10.5.2 Dynamics of One Cell 543 10.5.2.1 Dynamics of the Passive Sub-Cell 543 10.5.2.2 Dynamics of the Active Sub-Cell 543 10.5.2.3 Dynamics of the Entire Cell 545 10.5.2.4 Dynamics of the Entire Periodic Structure 546 10.6 Localization Characteristics of Passive and Active Aperiodic Structures 549 10.6.1 Overview 549 10.6.2 Localization Factor 550 10.7 Periodic Rod with Periodic Shunted Piezoelectric Patches 559 10.7.1 Transfer Matrix of a Plain Rod Element 559 10.7.2 Transfer Matrix of a Rod/Piezo-Patch Element 560 10.7.3 Transfer Matrix of a Unit Cell 561 10.8 Two-Dimensional Active Periodic Structure 562 10.8.1 Dynamics of Unit Cell 562 10.8.2 Formulation of Phase Constant Surfaces 566 10.8.3 Filtering Characteristics 568 10.9 Periodic Structures with Internal Resonances 569 10.9.1 Dynamics of Conventional Periodic Structure 570 10.9.2 Dynamics of Periodic Structure with Internal Resonances 572 10.9.2.1 Equivalent Mass. Of the Mass-In-Mass Arrangement 572 10.9.2.2 Transfer Matrix of the Mass-In-Mass Arrangement 572 10.10 Summary 578 References 578 11 Nanoparticle Damping Composites 589 11.1 Introduction 589 11.2 Nanoparticle-Filled Polymer Composites 590 11.2.1 Composites with Unidirectional Inclusions 591 11.2.2 Arbitrarily Oriented Inclusion Composites 599 11.3 Comparisons with Classical Filler Reinforcement Methods 607 11.4 Applications of Carbon Black/Polymer Composites 614 11.4.1 Basic Physical Characteristics 614 11.4.2 Modeling of the Piezo-Resistance of CB/Polymer Composites 617 11.4.3 The Piezo-Resistivity of CB/Polymer Composites 619 11.5 CB/Polymer Composite as a Shunting Resistance of Piezoelectric Layers 620 11.5.1 Finite Element Model 620 11.5.2 Condensed Model of a Unit Cell 624 11.6 Hybrid Composites with Shunted Piezoelectric Particles 629 11.6.1 Composite Description and Assumptions 629 11.6.2 Shunted Piezoelectric Inclusions 631 11.6.3 Typical Performance Characteristics of Hybrid Composites 631 11.7 Summary 636 References 636 12 Power Flow in Damped Structures 651 12.1 Introduction 651 12.2 Vibrational Power 651 12.2.1 Basic Definitions 651 12.2.2 Relationship to System Energies 652 12.2.3 Basic Characteristics of the Power Flow 653 12.3 Vibrational Power Flow in Beams 656 12.4 Vibrational Power of Plates 661 12.4.1 Basic Equations of Vibrating Plates 661 12.4.2 Power Flow and Structural Intensity 662 12.4.3 Control of the Power Flow and Structural Intensity 668 12.4.4 Power Flow and Structural Intensity for Plates with Passive and Active Constrained Layer Damping Treatments 671 12.5 Power Flow and Structural Intensity for Shells 679 12.6 Summary 682 References 682 Glossary 699 Appendix 703 Index 715

Read more less